Specifications | Ford 2009 Explorer Sport Trac Automobile User Manual

Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
4
14
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
Message center
14
21
25
Entertainment Systems
43
AM/FM stereo
AM/FM stereo with CD
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD
Auxiliary input jack
USB port
Satellite radio information
Family entertainment system
Navigation system
SYNC威
Climate Controls
Heater only
Manual heating and air conditioning
Dual automatic temperature control
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
Upfitter controls
Moon roof
43
45
52
59
61
65
68
97
97
98
98
99
102
107
107
112
113
120
120
121
124
126
131
137
138
1
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Locks and Security
148
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
148
148
159
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Trailer brake controller-integrated
Recreational towing
Driving
Starting
Brakes
Traction Control™
Transmission operation
Reverse sensing system
Rear-view camera system
Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher control
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Wheel lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
2
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
163
163
172
184
194
215
218
220
236
243
251
255
262
263
263
268
270
275
280
282
302
302
303
304
305
314
329
330
335
Table of Contents
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)
337
343
343
Cleaning
344
Maintenance and Specifications
354
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data
356
359
362
364
370
388
389
390
394
Accessories
397
Ford Extended Service Plan
399
Index
402
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2009 Ford Motor Company
3
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an
accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel
supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden
vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the
Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
4
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
5
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles
Read the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation
and maintenance of your Diesel-powered light truck.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
6
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a
snowplow, refer to the Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/ and
then by selecting “Contact Us” or by phone at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which
could lead to fires.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is located on the driver’s side door pillar or on the rear
edge of the driver’s door. You can determine whether the ambulance
manufacturer followed Ford’s recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer. Ford Ambulance Preparation Package is only available
on certain Diesel engine equipped vehicles.
Using your vehicle as a stationary power source (PTO)
Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for
operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take-off system.
7
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威 supplement for more information.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are
capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near
crash event. The recorded information may assist in the
investigation of such an event. The modules may record
information about both the vehicle and the occupants, potentially
including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling;
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel; and
• longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location, using GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors.
8
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
To access this information, special equipment must be directly
connected to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada. To the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC威 or its
features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped)
is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and
connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag
or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle
location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not
activate the feature. See your SYNC威 supplement for more
information. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions
and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威 supplement
for more information.
9
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Modification Data Recording
Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage; refer to the What is not covered section in The new vehicle
limited warranty for your vehicle chapter of your vehicle’s Warranty
Guide for more information. Some vehicles are equipped with
Powertrain Control Systems that can detect and store information about
vehicle modifications that, for example, increase horsepower and torque
output; this information cannot be erased and will stay in the system’s
memory even if the modification is removed. When a dealer or repair
facility works on your vehicle, it may be necessary for them to access the
information in the Powertrain Control System. This information will likely
identify if any unauthorized modifications have been made to the system,
which may be used to determine if the warranty has been violated and if
repairs will be covered by warranty.
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
10
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
11
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
12
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
MAX
MIN
13
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Automatic transmission cluster shown, manual similar
Harley-Davidson vehicles
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
14
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light description for additional information.
Note: Some warning lights are
reconfigurable telltale (RTT)
indicator lights and will illuminate in
the message center. These lights
function the same as the other
warning lights.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the on position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the “Service engine
soon” light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if
no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the “Service
engine soon” light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
15
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the on position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the
brake system should be inspected immediately by your servicing
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to on, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will sound when there is
a malfunction in the indicator light.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
16
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range. Refer to Engine oil
in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Low tire pressure warning (if
equipped): Illuminates when your
tire pressure is low. If the light
remains on at start up or while
driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to on, the light will
illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light
does not turn on, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
For more information on this system, refer to Understanding your tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction
with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Powertrain malfunction/Reduced
power/Electronic throttle
control (RTT): Displays when the
engine has defaulted to a
“limp-home” operation or when a transmission problem has been
detected and shifting may be restricted. If the light remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Traction control (RTT) (if
equipped): Displays when the
traction control system is active. If
the light remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by
your authorized dealer. Refer to Traction control in the Driving chapter
for more information
17
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Check fuel cap (RTT): Displays
when the fuel cap may not be
properly installed. Continued driving
with this light on may cause the
Service engine soon warning light to
come on. Refer to Fuel filler cap in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature
(RTT): Displays when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let it
cool. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Low fuel (RTT): Displays when
the fuel level in the fuel tank is at
or near empty (refer to Fuel gauge
in this chapter).
Door ajar (RTT): Displays when
the ignition is in the on position and
any door is open.
Transmission Tow/Haul Feature
(automatic transmission) (if
equipped): The Tow Haul light
remains illuminated as long as the
Tow/Haul feature is activated. Refer to the Driving chapter for
transmission function and operation. If the light remains illuminated and
will not cancel using the Tow/Haul switch located on the end of the gear
shift lever, have the system serviced immediately or damage to the
transmission could occur.
18
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Four wheel drive low (if
equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive low is engaged.
4x4
LOW
Four wheel drive high (if
equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive high is engaged.
4x4
HIGH
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock威 Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Speed control (if equipped):
Illuminates when the speed control
is activated. Turns off when the
speed control system is deactivated.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, it has some unique
warning lights; refer to Instrument Cluster in your Power Stroke 6.0
and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide
Supplement for detailed information on their function.
Diesel warning lights:
• Glow plug pre-heat
• Water in fuel
• Low oil pressure
19
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake on warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km). If the warning remains on after the parking brake is off, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Turn signal chime: Sounds when the turn signal lever has been
activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven
more than 2 miles (3.2 km).
Message center activation chime: Sounds when some warning
messages appears in the message center display for the first time.
Overspeed chime (if equipped): Sounds when the vehicle speed
reaches 75 mph (120 km/h) or higher.
Airbag secondary warning chime: Sounds to inform the driver, in the
event that the airbag readiness warning lamp is inoperable, that there is
a fault in the supplemental restraint system.
20
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed.
Standard instrument cluster
Harley-Davidson instrument
cluster
21
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle. Refer to
Standard message center or
Optional message center in this
chapter on how to switch the
display from Metric to English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
• With standard message center:
Press the SELECT/RESET stem
once to switch from the odometer to
the trip odometer. Press the stem
again to select Trip A and Trip B
features. To reset the trip, press and
hold the stem until it resets.
• With optional message center:
See TRIP A/B under Optional message center in this chapter.
22
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine.
Standard instrument cluster
Harley-Davidson instrument
cluster
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil
level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your authorized dealer.
23
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the on position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Battery voltage gauge (manual
transmission only): Indicates the
battery voltage when the ignition is
in the on position. If the pointer
moves and stays outside the normal
operating range, have the vehicle’s
electrical system checked as soon as
possible.
Transmission fluid temperature gauge (automatic transmission
only): If the gauge is in the:
Normal area– the transmission
fluid is within the normal operating
temperature (between “H” and “C”).
Yellow area– the transmission fluid
is higher than normal operating
temperature. This can be caused by
special operating conditions (i.e.
snowplowing, towing or off road
use). Refer to Special operating
conditions in the scheduled
maintenance information for
instructions. Operating the transmission for extended periods of time
with the gauge in the yellow area may cause internal transmission
damage.
24
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Altering the severity of the operating conditions is recommended to
lower the transmission temperature into the normal range.
Red area– the transmission fluid is
overheating. Stop the vehicle to
allow the temperature to return to
normal range.
If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area, stop the vehicle and
verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow
through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see
your authorized dealer.
STANDARD MESSAGE CENTER
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle systems
and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with
an informational message followed by a long indicator chime.
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster.
Selectable features (information menu)
Press and release the SELECT/RESET button, located in the speedometer,
to scroll and reset the following functions. Select or reset the function by
holding the SELECT/RESET button for more than 2 seconds.
TRIP
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release the
SELECT/RESET button on the cluster to toggle between odometer and
trip odometer display. To reset, press and hold for less than two seconds.
ENG HRS
Registers the accumulated time the engine has been running.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km), to empty. Press RESET to clear this
warning message. It will return at approximately 25 miles (40 km),
10 miles (16 km) and 0 miles (0 km) to empty.
25
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
XX.X MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the SELECT/RESET button (press and hold the
SELECT/RESET button for two seconds in order to reset the function)
after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy
readings.
Setup menu (vehicle customization and vehicle system check)
HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET button to get into the setup menu
sequence for the following displays:
Note: When returning to the setup menu and a non-English language
has been selected, HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to
change back to English. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET button to
change back to English.
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
26
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
(approximately 7,500 miles [12,000 km] or 12 months) perform the
following:
1. Press and release the setup button to display “OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD
RESET = NEW”.
2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for two seconds and release
to reset the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% miles value from 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 12 months to another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
SELECT/RESET stem to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release
and press will reduce the value by 10%.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil
life start value to 4,500 miles (7,200 km) and 219 days.
UNITS
Displays the current units English or Metric.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET button to change from English to
Metric.
Press the SELECT/RESET button for the next setup menu item or wait
for more than four seconds to return to the info menu.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Note: When entering the setup menu and a non-English language has
been selected, “PRESS RESET FOR ENGLISH” will be displayed to
change back to English.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET button to select a new language.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish and French
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET button for two seconds to set the
language choice.
Press the SELECT/RESET button for the next setup menu item or wait
for more than four seconds to return to the info menu.
27
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET button to select SYSTEM CHECK
when HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK is displayed in the message
center. For each of the monitored systems, the message center will
indicate either an OK message or a warning message for two seconds.
Pressing the SELECT/RESET button cycles the message center through
each of the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. XXX% OIL LIFE
2. ENGINE HOURS
3. ENGINE IDLE HOURS (Diesel engine only)
4. CHARGING SYSTEM
5. DOOR AJAR
6. BRAKE SYSTEM
7. TBC GAIN = XX.X
NO TRAILER (if equipped and no trailer connected)
8. TBC GAIN = XX.X
OUTPUT = ////// (if equipped and trailer connected)
9. XX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL XXX
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
• Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
• Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
28
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
• Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
• Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing the
SELECT/RESET button. This allows you to use the full message
center functionality by clearing the message.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is
applied (or not fully released).
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when a fault has been detected
by the ABS module.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger’s door is
not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early
reminder of a low fuel condition.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER (if equipped) — Displayed if there
are certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed when a
trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or
unintentionally, and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. Refer
to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more
information.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
29
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped) — Displayed when one or more
tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your
tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed
when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For
more information on how the system operates under these conditions,
refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
ENGINE WARMING PLEASE WAIT XX (Diesel engine only) —
Displayed in extremely cold weather, typically below –15°F (–26°C), if
the engine block heater is not utilized. The engine will not respond to
accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds; this is done so the engine oil
can be properly circulated to avoid engine damage from lack of
lubrication. A timer will begin a countdown from 30 seconds. Once the
counter has reached 0 (Zero) seconds, OK TO DRIVE will be displayed
and the engine will respond to accelerator pedal movement. Refer to
your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for more information.
OK TO DRIVE (Diesel engine only) — Displayed when the time
counter has reached 0 (zero) and the engine is sufficiently warm enough
to drive in extremely cold weather (refer to the engine warming please
wait message description mentioned previously). Refer to your Power
Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide
Supplement for more information.
DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR (Diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and
needs to be drained. Refer to your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more
information.
30
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
ENGINE TURNS OFF IN XX (Diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the vehicle is in the final 30 seconds of a countdown to where the
engine will intentionally be turned off by the PCM. The diesel engine
shutdown is a (regulatory) requirement which may be required of a
particular diesel vehicle for sale in states requiring this feature. Refer to
your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for more information.
ENGINE TURNED OFF (Diesel engine only) — Displayed after the
30 second countdown. Refer to your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more
information.
DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER (Diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is full of particles
(exhaust soot) and the vehicle is not being operated in a manner to
allow normal cleaning. This message will stay on until the exhaust filter
cleaning has begun, at which time the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER
message will be displayed. It is recommended the vehicle operator drive
the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the CLEANING EXHAUST
FILTER message turns off. This message is NORMAL. Refer to your
Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s
Guide Supplement for more information.
Note: If this message is ignored, your vehicle will continue to fill the
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) with particles (exhaust soot). If cleaning
light will illuminate and engine power may be
is not permitted, the
limited. If the vehicle is still not operated in a manner to allow cleaning,
will illuminate and engine power will
the service engine soon light
be further limited. Dealer service will then be required to restore your
vehicle to full-power operation.
Note: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) regeneration will not initiate at idle
or in Power-Take-Off (PTO) mode. When DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST
FILTER is displayed in the message center, PTO and/or Stationary
Elevated Idle Control (SEIC) must be disengaged/inactive in order to
properly clean the DPF. The vehicle must be driven until the CLEANING
EXHAUST FILTER message turns off.
31
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER (Diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine actions
will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
system to burn off the particles (exhaust soot). After the particles are
burned off, the exhaust temperature will fall back to normal levels. This
message is NORMAL. Refer to your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more
information.
WARNING: When the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER message
appears in the message center, do not park near flammable
materials, vapors or structures until filter cleaning is complete.
EXHAUST FILTER DRIVE COMPLETE (Diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) has been adequately
cleaned after the DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER followed by
CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER messages have been displayed. This
message is NORMAL. Refer to your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more
information.
STOP SAFELY NOW (Diesel engine only) — Displayed and a chime
sounds when the vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeds intended
operating range. If this warning occurs, engine power is reduced and the
engine will shut down when the vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and contact your
authorized dealer. Depending on the severity of the over-temperature
condition, the vehicle may not restart after cycling the ignition off. If the
vehicle restarts, there may be limited power. If the exhaust
over-temperature condition reoccurs, the message center will display
STOP SAFELY NOW, the chime will sound, and engine power will be
reduced again and shut down below 3 mph (5km/h). Refer to your
Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s
Guide Supplement for more information.
OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON (Gas engine only) — Displayed when the
engine oil life remaining is 5% or less.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (Gas engine only) — Displayed when the
oil life left reaches 0%. OIL LIFE OK displays after you have changed the
oil.
32
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
OPTIONAL MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator
chime.
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster.
Selectable features
Info (information menu)
Press the INFO button repeatedly to
cycle through the following features:
RESET
SETUP
INFO
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release the INFO
button until the TRIP A/B appear in the display (this represents the trip
mode). Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to reset.
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to
English.
ENG HRS
Registers the accumulated time the engine has been running.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km), to empty. Press RESET to clear this
warning message. It will return at approximately 25 miles (40 km),
10 miles (16 km) and 0 miles (0 km) miles to empty.
33
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
XX.X MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET button (press and hold RESET for
two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
TIMER
Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time.
To operate, do the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET until the timer resets.
34
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
System check and vehicle feature customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly
to cycle the message center through
the following features:
RESET
SETUP
INFO
Note: When returning to the SETUP menu and a non-English language
has been selected, HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to
change back to English. Press and hold the RESET button to change
back to English.
RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
When this message appears, press the RESET button and the message
center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a
status of the item if needed.
1. OIL LIFE (Gas engine only)
2. ENGINE HOURS
3. ENGINE IDLE HOURS (Diesel engine only)
4. CHARGING SYSTEM
5. DOOR AJAR
6. BRAKE SYSTEM
7. TBC GAIN = XX.X
NO TRAILER (if equipped and no trailer connected)
8. TBC GAIN = XX.X
OUTPUT = ////// (if equipped and trailer connected)
9. FUEL LEVEL
Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
35
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
(approximately 7,500 miles [12,000 km] or 12 months) perform the
following:
1. Press and release the SETUP button to display “OIL LIFE XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW”.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds and release to reset
the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% miles value from 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 12 months to another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
RESET button to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release and press
will reduce the value by 10%.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil
life start value to 4,500 miles (7,200 km) and 219 days.
UNITS
Displays the current units English or Metric.
Press the RESET button to change from English to Metric.
AUTOLAMP (SEC)
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
Press the RESET control to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0,
10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
Press the RESET control to turn autolock on or off.
ZONE <XX> RESET = CHANGE
The compass heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and
NW in the message center display.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
36
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Do the following to set the proper zone:
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
1. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2
2. Turn ignition to the on position.
3. Start the engine.
4
1
15
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
4. From the SETUP menu, press and release the RESET button until the
message center display changes to show the current zone setting ZONE
<XX> RESET = CHANGE.
5. Press and release the RESET button repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center.
The range of zone values are from 1 to 15 and “wraps” back to 1.
6. To exit the zone setting mode, and to “lock in” your change:
• press and release the SETUP button or,
• press INFO button to exit or,
• wait four seconds and the zone will be “locked in”.
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
7. Press the RESET button until the display reads RESET FOR
CALIBRATION to start the compass calibration function.
37
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
8. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until
the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION
COMPLETED. It will take up to five circles to complete calibration.
9. The compass is now calibrated.
Note: If the RESET button is pressed or three minutes has expired, the
display will go back to the INFO menu and will show CAL instead of the
compass heading until the compass is calibrated.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message
center through each of the language choices.
Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to set the language
choice.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
• Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
• Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
• Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET.
This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing
the message.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is
applied (or not fully released).
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when a fault has been detected
by the ABS module.
38
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger’s door is
not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime if there are certain faults in the vehicle
wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. Refer to Trailer towing in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
TRAILER CONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed when a correct
trailer connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed during
a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime when a trailer connection becomes
disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped) — Displayed when one or more
tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your
tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed
when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
39
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For
more information on how the system operates under these conditions,
refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
ENGINE WARMING PLEASE WAIT XX (Diesel engine only) —
Displayed in extremely cold weather, typically below –15°F (–26°C), if
the engine block heater is not utilized. The engine will not respond to
accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds; this is done so the engine oil
can be properly circulated to avoid engine damage from lack of
lubrication. A timer will begin a countdown from 30 seconds. Once the
counter has reached 0 (Zero) seconds, OK TO DRIVE will be displayed
and the engine will respond to accelerator pedal movement. Refer to
your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for more information.
OK TO DRIVE (Diesel engine only) — Displayed when the time
counter has reached 0 (zero) and the engine is sufficiently warm enough
to drive in extremely cold weather (refer to the engine warming please
wait message description mentioned previously). Refer to your Power
Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide
Supplement for more information.
DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR (Diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and
needs to be drained. Refer to your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more
information.
ENGINE TURNS OFF IN XX (Diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the vehicle is in the final 30 seconds of a countdown to where the
engine will intentionally be turned off by the PCM. The diesel engine
shutdown is a (regulatory) requirement which may be required of a
particular diesel vehicle for sale in states requiring this feature. Refer to
your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for more information.
ENGINE TURNED OFF (Diesel engine only) — Displayed after the
30 second countdown. Refer to your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more
information.
40
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER (Diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is full of particles
(exhaust soot) and the vehicle is not being operated in a manner to
allow normal cleaning. This message will stay on until the exhaust filter
cleaning has begun, at which time the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER
message will be displayed. It is recommended the vehicle operator drive
the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the CLEANING EXHAUST
FILTER message turns off. This message is NORMAL. Refer to your
Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s
Guide Supplement for more information.
Note: If this message is ignored, your vehicle will continue to fill the
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) with particles (exhaust soot). If cleaning
light will illuminate and engine power may be
is not permitted, the
limited. If the vehicle is still not operated in a manner to allow cleaning,
will illuminate and engine power will
the service engine soon light
be further limited. Dealer service will then be required to restore your
vehicle to full-power operation.
Note: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) regeneration will not initiate at idle
or in Power-Take-Off (PTO) mode. When DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST
FILTER is displayed in the message center, PTO and/or Stationary
Elevated Idle Control (SEIC) must be disengaged/inactive in order to
properly clean the DPF. The vehicle must be driven until the CLEANING
EXHAUST FILTER message turns off.
CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER (Diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine actions
will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
system to burn off the particles (exhaust soot). After the particles are
burned off, the exhaust temperature will fall back to normal levels. This
message is NORMAL. Refer to your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more
information.
WARNING: When the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER message
appears in the message center, do not park near flammable
materials, vapors or structures until filter cleaning is complete.
41
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
EXHAUST FILTER DRIVE COMPLETE (Diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) has been adequately
cleaned after the DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER followed by
CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER messages have been displayed. This
message is NORMAL. Refer to your Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more
information.
STOP SAFELY NOW (Diesel engine only) — Displayed and a chime
sounds when the vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeds intended
operating range. If this warning occurs, engine power is reduced and the
engine will shut down when the vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and contact your
authorized dealer. Depending on the severity of the over-temperature
condition, the vehicle may not restart after cycling the ignition off. If the
vehicle restarts, there may be limited power. If the exhaust
over-temperature condition reoccurs, the message center will display
STOP SAFELY NOW, the chime will sound, and engine power will be
reduced again and shut down below 3 mph (5km/h). Refer to your
Power Stroke 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s
Guide Supplement for more information.
OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON (Gas engine only) — Displayed when the
engine oil life remaining is 5% or less.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (Gas engine only) — Displayed when the
oil life left reaches 0%. OIL LIFE OK displays after you have changed the
oil.
42
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM stereo system (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
The AM/FM stereo system does not contain rear speakers; only front
driver side and passenger side speakers.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches and radio may be used for up to ten
minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is
opened.
/
(Tuner): Press to
1.
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Press and hold for a fast
advance through radio frequencies.
Also use in AUDIO mode to gain
access to various settings.
43
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. AUDIO: Press AUDIO repeatedly
to gain access to the following
settings:
TREB (Treble): Press AUDIO to reach the treble setting.
/
/
SEEK
.
Use
BASS (Bass): Press AUDIO to reach the bass setting.
/
/
SEEK
.
Use
BAL (Balance): Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting.
/
/
SEEK
to adjust between the left and right
Use
speakers.
Setting the clock: Press and hold CLK until the hours start to flash,
/
/
SEEK
to adjust. To adjust minutes, press CLK
then use
/
/
again to make the minutes start to flash and use
to adjust. Press CLK again to exit the clock setting mode.
SEEK
3. SEEK: Press
SEEK
to
access the previous/next strong
station.
4. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until sound returns. You may store up to
six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18.
5. AM/FM: Press AM/FM to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
6. ON/OFF/Volume: Press VOL PUSH to turn ON/OFF. Turn VOL PUSH to increase/decrease volume.
44
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
7. CLK (Clock): Press CLK to
toggle between the clock and radio
frequency.
AM/FM stereo single CD/satellite compatible sound system
(if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which
allows you to operate the window switches and the audio for up to ten
minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front door is
opened.
/
: Press
/
to
1.
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Press and hold for a fast
advance through radio frequencies.
45
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
/
to tune to the
next/previous channel.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2.
(Phone): If your vehicle is
equipped with SYNC威, press to
access SYNC PHONE features. For
further information, please refer to supplemental information on SYNC威
included with your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC威, the display will read NO
PHONE.
3. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to access to the following settings:
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SET HOUR or SET MINUTES is
displayed. Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the
hours/minutes.
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
menu. Press
/
to cycle through the following options:
• CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press
/
to
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song title in the
system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save a song when the
system is full, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to
access the saved songs and press
/
to cycle through the saved
songs. When the song appears in the display that you would like to
replace, press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
46
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song title from the system’s
memory. Press
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song title appears in the display that you would like to delete, press
OK. The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK
again and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want
to delete the currently listed song, press
/
to select either
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all songs from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Use
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Use
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the audio between the left
Use
(L) and right (R) speakers.
47
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the audio between the back
(B) and front (F) speakers.
SPEEDVOL (Speed sensitive volume, if equipped): Press MENU to
reach the SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder
with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Track/Folder mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode. In Track
SEEK, SEEK
will scroll through all tracks on the
mode, pressing
disc
SEEK, SEEK
will scroll only through
In Folder mode, pressing
tracks within the selected folder.
FOLDER, FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if
Press
available).
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS
Use
is ON, the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode, if
equipped) and SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes (satellite radio, if
equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
48
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
5. SEEK: In radio mode,
/
to access the
press
previous/next strong station.
/
In CD/MP3 mode, press
to access the previous/next CD/MP3 track.
SEEK, SEEK
to
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press
SEEK, SEEK
to seek to the
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK
to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
SEEK, SEEK
to view the
In TEXT MODE, press
previous/additional display text.
SEEK, SEEK
to select a category.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
/
OK (Play/Pause): This
6.
control is operational in CD/MP3
mode. When a CD/MP3 is playing,
press to pause or play the current CD/MP3. The CD/MP3 status will
display in the radio display.
OK: Use in various menu selections.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System (FES)
please refer to the Family entertainment DVD system section later in
this chapter.
7. SHUFFLE: In CD/MP3 mode,
press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK
to begin random play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the
current track is finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display. To
disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In CD/MP3 mode, press SHUFFLE to play the tracks in random
order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all tracks
within the current folder.
49
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
8. FOLDER
: In folder mode,
to access next
press FOLDER
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
9.
FOLDER to access the
press
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset control until sound returns. You may store up to
six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name,
and disc title.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be
to view the
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
SEEK
to view the previous display text.
50
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press AM/FM to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press
VOL-PUSH to turn on/off. Turn
VOL-PUSH to increase/decrease
volume.
Note:If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on
at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD is already loaded into
the system, CD/MP3 play will begin
where it ended last.
17.
CD.
(CD eject): Press to eject a
18. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up in the CD slot.
51
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Premium/Premium plus in-dash six CD/MP3/satellite compatible
sound system (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which
allows you to operate the window switches and audio for up to ten
minutes after the ignition has turned off or until either front door has
opened.
/
(Tune/Disc selector):
1.
In radio mode, press to manually
) or down (
) the
go up (
radio frequency. Press and hold for
a fast advance through radio frequencies.
In menu mode, use to select various settings.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to select the desired disc.
52
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
(Phone): If your vehicle is
2.
equipped with SYNC威, press to
access SYNC PHONE features. For
further information, please refer to supplemental information on SYNC威
included with your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC威, the display will read NO
PHONE.
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access to the following settings:
Setting the clock: Press until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is
/
/
SEEK
to adjust the hours/minutes.
displayed. Press
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
/
to cycle through the following options:
menu. Press
/
to
• CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song title in the
system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save a song when the
system is full, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to
/
to cycle through the saved
access the saved songs and press
songs. When the song appears in the display that you would like to
replace, press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
53
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
memory. Press
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
/
to select either
delete the currently listed song, press
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all songs from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
/
/
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use
SEEK, SEEK
to turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
RBDS: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, INFORM, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears in
/
/
SEEK
to toggle RBDS ON/OFF. When
the display. Use
RBDS is OFF, you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations
or view the station name or type.
54
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To search for specific RBDS music categories: When the desired
category appears in the display, press
/
to find the desired type,
then press and release
SEEK, SEEK
or press and hold SCAN to
begin the search.
To view the station name or type: When the desired category appears
in the display, press TEXT/SCAN to toggle between displaying the station
type (COUNTRY, ROCK, etc.) or the station name (WYCD, WXYZ, etc.).
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Use
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the audio between the left
Use
(L) and right (R) speakers.
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the audio between the back
Use
(B) and front (F) speakers.
ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode) (Available on Audiophile radios only):
/
/
SEEK
to
Press MENU repeatedly to access. Press
optimize sound for ALL SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.
SPEEDVOL (Speed sensitive volume, if equipped): Press MENU to
reach the SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder
with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Use
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Track/Folder Mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode. In Track
SEEK
will scroll through all tracks on the disc.
Mode, pressing
55
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In Folder mode, pressing
SEEK
will scroll only through tracks
within the selected folder.
Press
FOLDER, FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if
available).
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS
is ON, the system will bring soft and loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (Auxiliary audio mode, if
equipped), SYNC威, SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes (satellite radio if
equipped).
For location and further information on the auxiliary audio mode, refer
to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System (FES)
please refer to the Family entertainment DVD system section later in
this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
5. SEEK: In radio mode,
press
/
to access the
previous/next strong station.
/
In CD/MP3 mode, press
to access the previous/next CD track.
SEEK, SEEK
to
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
SEEK, SEEK
to seek to the
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK
to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
SEEK, SEEK
to view the
In TEXT MODE, press
previous/additional display text.
SEEK, SEEK
to select a
In CATEGORY MODE, press
category.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
56
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
6.
/
OK (Play/Pause): This
control is operational in CD/MP3
mode. When a CD/MP3 is playing,
press to pause or play the current CD. The CD status will display in the
radio display.
OK: Use in various menu selections.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System (FES)
please refer to the Family entertainment DVD system section later in
this chapter.
7. SHUFFLE: In CD/MP3 mode,
press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK
to begin random play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the
current track is finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display. To
disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
8. FOLDER
: In folder mode,
to access next
press FOLDER
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
9.
press
FOLDER to access the
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
folders are available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset control until sound returns. You may store up to
six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18.
57
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
2 seconds to activate mode to hear
a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name,
and disc title and file name (if available).
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
to view the
SEEK
additional display text. When the “>” indicator is active, press
to view the previous display text.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop.
In CATEGORY MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of channels
in the selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note: If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD is already loaded into
the system, CD/MP3 play will begin
where it ended last.
58
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
17. LOAD: To load a disc into the
system, press LOAD. Select a slot
number using memory presets 1–6.
When the display reads LOAD CD#,
load the desired disc, label side up.
If you do not choose a slot within five seconds, the system will choose
for you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in the last slot loaded will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 track and folder structure later in this
chapter for further information.
(CD eject): To eject a disc
18.
from the system, press
. Select
the correct slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system will eject the disc and the
display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds,
the system will reload the disc.
until the system begins
To auto eject up to 6 CDs, press and hold
ejecting the current disc. Remove the current disc and the next disc will
be ejected. If the current disc is not removed, the system will reload the
disc.
19. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up.
Auxiliary input jack (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
59
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack, located on the
instrument panel below the power
point, provides a way to connect
your portable music player to the
in-vehicle audio system. This allows
the audio from a portable music
player to be played through the
vehicle speakers with high fidelity.
To achieve optimal performance,
please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable
music device to the audio system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to the
Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio Features chapter of your
Navigation System supplement.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
60
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persist, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
61
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port located on the instrument
panel. This feature allows you to
plug in media playing devices,
memory sticks, and also to charge
devices if they support this feature.
For further information on this
feature, refer to Accessing and
using your USB port in the SYNC威
supplement or Navigation System
supplement.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
62
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or
qualified technician.
63
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
.mp3 1
1
files may be present, (files with
.mp3 2
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
.mp3 3
2
by the system. This enables you to
.mp3 4
3
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
.mp3 5
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
.mp3 6
4
.mp3 7
.doc
.ppt
.xls
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
64
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music
channels over the internet using any computer connected to the
internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
65
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
SAT FAULT
INVALID CHNL
UNSUBSCRIBED
Condition
Action Required
Radio requires more
No action required.
than two seconds to
This message should
produce audio for the
disappear shortly.
selected channel.
Internal module or
If this message does
system failure
not clear within a short
present.
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
Channel no longer
This previously
available.
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
Subscription not
Contact SIRIUS at
available for this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel or tune to
another channel.
66
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO TEXT
NO TEXT
NO TEXT
NO SIGNAL
UPDATING
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Condition
Action Required
Artist information not Artist information not
available.
available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
Song title information Song title information
not available.
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Category information
Category information
not available.
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
You are in a location
Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS satellite or
that is blocking the
SIRIUS tower to the
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
tunnel, under an
vehicle antenna.
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
Update of channel
No action required. The
programming in
process may take up to
progress.
three minutes.
Satellite service has
Call SIRIUS at
been deactivated by
1–888–539–7474 to
SIRIUS Satellite
re-activate or resolve
Radio.
subscription issues.
67
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System
(FES) which allows you to listen to audio CDs, MP3 discs, watch DVDs
and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems. The
DVD player is capable of playing standard DVDs, CDs, MP3s and is
compatible with CD-R/W, CD-R and certain CD-ROM media.
Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and
controls as well as the very important safety information.
Note: Any notations or restrictions on individual DVD system controls
are applicable to the overhead controls as well as to duplicate controls
found on the remote control.
Quick start
Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system, two sets of
wireless infrared (IR) headphones and a wireless infrared (IR) remote
control.
Note: To disable the DVD rear-seat controls:
• If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, press the
MEDIA or RADIO hard button. Select the ’Rear Zone’ tab on the
touchscreen. Press the ’disabled’ button. (Press the ’enabled’ button to
turn the rear controls on again.)
• If your vehicle is equipped with an audio system, press the 3 and 5
preset buttons simultaneously. (Press again to enable the controls).
To play a DVD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play DVD-Video, DVD-R, DVD-R/W discs as well as
audio CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the disc for finger
prints, scratches and cleanliness. Clean with a soft cloth, wiping from
center to edge.
1. Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode.
2. Insert a DVD into the system, label-side up to turn on the system. It
will load automatically.
68
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. Press the power button on the
to
DVD player, then press Play
begin to play the disc.
If a DVD is already loaded into the
system, press PLAY on the DVD
player.
Note: If sound can be heard, but no video is present, press VIDEO to
select the video source (DVD or aux-inputs).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, when a disc
is inserted, the DVD system will automatically switch to dual-play mode;
the rear speakers will turn off, and the headphones will turn on. To turn
on the DVD system bezel.
the rear speakers on again, press
Press VIDEO to change the source
displayed on the screen. Press
repeatedly to cycle through:
DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX, NON-DVD,
OFF.
Press the power button to turn the
system off. The indicator light will
turn off indicating the system is off.
Note: The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers
and can be adjusted by the radio volume control.
To play a CD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play audio CDs, CD-R and CD-R/W, CD-ROM and
video CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the disc for finger
prints and scratches. Clean the disc with a soft cloth, wiping from the
center to the edge.
1. Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode.
2. Insert a CD into the system,
label-side up to turn on the DVD
system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a CD in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
69
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ‘CD Audio Disc’ screen will
display. From this screen, you can
also select from COMPRESSION,
SHUFFLE and SCAN features.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped
with a navigation system, when a
disc is inserted, the DVD system will
automatically switch to dual-play mode; the rear speakers will turn off,
and the headphones will turn on. To turn the rear speakers on again,
on the DVD system bezel.
press
To play an MP3 disc in the DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode.
2. Insert an MP3 disc into the
system, label-side up to turn on the
DVD system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a disc in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ‘MP3 Audio Disc’ screen will
display and allow you to access the
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE, SCAN
and FOLDER MODE features.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped
with a navigation system, when a
disc is inserted, the DVD system will
automatically switch to dual-play mode; the rear speakers will turn off,
and the headphones will turn on. To turn the rear speakers on again,
on the DVD system bezel.
press
To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system
The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic
devices such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette
recorders, etc.
1. Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode.
70
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. Press the power button to turn
the DVD system on. The indicator
light next to the power button will
illuminate.
3. Connect an auxiliary audio/video
source by connecting RCA cords
(not included) to the RCA jacks on
the left hand side of the system.
• Yellow (1) — video input
• White (2) — left channel audio
input
• Red (3) — right channel audio
input
4. Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, the MEDIA
button is only active in dual play mode.
5. Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to
DVD-AUX. If your source is properly plugged in, it will appear on the
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) screen. If your auxiliary source does not
have a video signal, or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal
from the auxiliary source, the screen will remain black. If the video
source is set to DVD-AUX, the display will automatically turn on if a
video signal is detected.
To listen to audio over the headphones (Dual play mode):
You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless headphones.
Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and Using wired
headphones for further information.
• Black (4) — wired headphone output (wired headphones not
included)
You can access dual play mode in any of the following ways:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system:
a. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is turned on. Inserting a DVD into
the system will automatically activate dual play mode.
b. Press the RADIO or MEDIA hard button on the navigation system.
Select the ‘Rear Zone’ tab on the touchscreen and select ‘On’ for the
headphones and ‘Enabled’ for the rear controls. To return to single
zone, select ‘Off’ for the headphones and ‘Disabled’ for the rear
controls.
71
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• If your vehicle is equipped with a radio:
a.Press the headphone/speaker (
/ ) button on the remote
control or DVD system. Press again to return to single play mode.
b.Press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the radio at the same time.
Press again to return to single play mode.
A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control
Button to indicate which channel is active (able to be controlled).
• Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel (A or
B). The audio source will be shown on the display. You may change
the active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button.
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, AUX). Channel B can only access DVD and
AUX sources.
Note: Refer to Single play/Dual play for more information.
Using the infrared (IR) wireless headphones:
1. Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON.
2. Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using
the A/B control on the ear piece.
3. Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece.
Using wired headphones (not included):
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children operate the system while unsupervised. If
wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
1. Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either
A or
B. Headphones
side of the DVD system. Each side is labeled
plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into
jack B will listen to Channel B.
2. Adjust the volume levels using
the volume controls on the DVD
system.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, volume
controls are only active in dual play mode
72
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To adjust display brightness:
To decrease/increase the brightness
level on the display screen, press
the brightness control on the DVD
system. A display will appear at the
bottom of the screen indicating the
brightness level. The brightness display will only appear when the menu
is not displayed.
DVD player controls
16
1
2
3
ENTER
MENU
6
4
5
A
RETURN
MEDIA
B
VIDEO
VOLUME
14
15
10
12
13
7
11
9
8
1. Headphone control A/B: While
in Dual Play mode, press to select
either the A or B headphone source.
Then press MEDIA to select the
desired playing media for that
headset. When a headphone channel has been selected (A or B),
selections will affect the source on that channel only.
Note: Headphone A can access any possible media (AM, FM1, FM2, SAT
(if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Headphone B can only access DVD
and DVD-AUX.
For further information, refer to Single play/Dual play later in this
section.
73
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2.
/
(Stop/Eject): Press
once to stop and press a second
time to eject a disc from the DVD
system.
(Reverse): Press and
3.
release for the previous chapter or
track. Press and hold to reverse
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
(Fast forward): Press and
4.
release for the next chapter or
track. Press and hold to forward
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
/
(Play/Pause): Press
5.
(Play) to select DVD mode (and to
turn the DVD system on if it is off).
If a disc is present, it will resume or begin to play. Press (Pause) while
playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD.
6. On/Off: Press to turn the DVD
system On/Off.
7. VIDEO: Press repeatedly to cycle
through the following video state
options which will be indicated on
the bottom right hand corner of the
display: DVD DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD and Off (no indicator). If you select the DVD-AUX video
source, the display will turn off if there is no video signal detected. When
a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input, and the display is
in the DVD-AUX video mode, the display will automatically turn on.
8. Infrared (IR) Receiver & Transmitter: System sensor which reads
the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the
infrared (IR) wireless headphones.
9. LCD screen: The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and
up into housing to store when not in use. Ensure that the screen is
latched into the housing when being stored.
74
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
10. Volume: If your vehicle is
equipped with a navigation system,
this function is only available when
in dual play mode. For all other
vehicles, when in single play mode,
) or decrease (
press to increase (
) the volume over all speakers.
) or decrease (
) the volume
When in Dual Play, press to increase (
for the wired headphones. (Wireless headphone volume is controlled
with the rotary dial on the right ear piece.)
/
(Headphones/Speakers): Press once for Dual Play
11.
(Headphone mode- the rear speakers are muted) and press again for
Single Play (same media playing through all speakers). You can also
press the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons on the audio system at the
same time to perform the same function. For further interaction
information, refer to Single Play/Dual play under Operation later in
this section.
12. MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
select from the various possible
playing media sources (AM, FM1,
FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). The media will show in
the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode.
When in Single Play mode, the media source will be displayed on the
radio.
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Channel B can only access
DVD and DVD-AUX sources.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, this function
is only active in dual play mode.
13. RETURN: Press to return to the
playing media or to resume
playback.
14. MENU: When playing a DVD,
press MENU once to enter the DVD
disc menu (if available) and press
twice to enter the system set-up menu. From the set-up menu, you may
select from Angle, Aspect Ratio, Language, Subtitles, Disc resume,
Compression, Restore Defaults and Back. For more detailed information,
refer to Menu mode.
75
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
15. ENTER: Press to select/confirm
the current selection.
16. Cursor /Brightness controls:
Use the cursor controls to make
various selections when in any
menu. When not in a menu, and in
/
to adjust
DVD mode, press
the brightness. A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen
indicating the brightness levels.
Remote control
Unless otherwise stated, all operations can be carried out with the
remote control. Always point the remote control directly at the player.
Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player.
1. Power control: Press to turn the FES (Family Entertainment
System) ON/OFF.
2. Cursor controls: Use in various active menus to advance the cursor
up/down/left/right. When not in a Menu, the left and right cursor controls
decrease and increase the display brightness.
76
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. DISPLAY: Press to access the on-screen display of the FES functions
and adjustments.
4. RETURN: Press to return to the previous menu screen.
5. ANGLE (DVD dependent): Press to select the angle to view the
scene.
6. Channel A/B: Press to select either A or B headphones and then use
the MEDIA control to select the desired playing media for the
headphones.
7. VOL (Volume): When in Single Play, press to increase (
) or
) the volume over all speakers. When in Dual Play, press to
decrease (
) or decrease (
) the volume for the wired headphones.
increase (
(Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the
right ear piece.)
8. Fast Forward/Next: In DVD mode, press and hold for a quick
advance within the DVD. Press and release to advance to the next
chapter. In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the next track.
9. Play/Pause: Press to play or pause a DVD.
10. SHUFFLE: Press to play all tracks on the current CD/MP3 disc in
random order.
11. STOP: Press to stop the current DVD or CD/MP3.
/
Speaker/Headphone (Single/Dual Play): Press to toggle
12.
between Single Play (same media playing through all speakers) and Dual
Play (headphone mode — the rear speakers are muted). You can also
press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time
to perform the same function.
13. Numeric Keypad: Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific
CD/MP3 track or DVD chapter to be played.
14. C (Cancel): Press to cancel/clear the numeric input (i.e. chapter
number).
15. MEDIA: Press to cycle through the possible media sources: AM,
FM1, FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, LINE IN (if equipped),
DVD-AUX.
Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources.
16. VIDEO: Press to cycle through video states: DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD, Off.
17. EJECT: Press to eject a disc from the FES.
77
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
18. Fast reverse/Previous: When a DVD is playing, press and hold for a
quick reverse within the DVD. Press and release for the previous
chapter. Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the previous track.
19. MENU: Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections. Press MENU
again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set-up menu.
20. SUBTITLE (DVD dependent): Press to turn the subtitle feature ON
or OFF.
21. LANGUAGE (DVD dependent): Press to select the desired language.
22. ENTER: Press to select the highlighted menu option.
23. ILLUMINATION: Press to illuminate the remote control and
backlight all of the buttons.
Battery replacement
Batteries are supplied with the
remote control unit. Since all
batteries have a limited shelf life,
replace them when the unit fails to
control the DVD player.
Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries.
The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with
the unit.
78
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Headphones
Wireless headphones
WARNING: The driver should never use the headphones while
driving the vehicle. Using headphones may prevent the driver
from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens,
which could result in a crash causing serious injury. Give your full
attention to driving and to the road.
Your FES system is equipped with
two sets of battery powered,
infrared wireless headphones. Two
AAA batteries are needed to operate
the headphones. (Batteries are
included.)
Additional infrared wireless
headphones may be purchased for
use with the system. Also, wired
headphones may be purchased and
plugged in where indicated on the
left and right hand sides of the
system. Refer to Wired
Headphones following.
79
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To install the batteries, remove the screw at the bottom of the cover.
Then, lightly press down on top and slide the cover off.
When replacing the batteries, use two new batteries (alkaline
recommended) and install them with the correct orientation as indicated
in the battery housing.
80
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To operate the headphones:
• Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones. A red
indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON. Press
POWER again to turn the headphones off.
• Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the
headband adjustment.
• Select the desired audio source (Channel A or B) for each set of
wireless headphones by using the A/B selection switch on the ear
piece.
• Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level.
Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use. After
approximately one minute of not being in use (no infrared signal is
received), the wireless headphones will automatically turn off. They will
also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature.
If this happens, simply turn the headphones on again and continue use.
81
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Wired headphones
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children operate the system while unsupervised. If
wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: The driver should never use the headphones while
driving the vehicle. Using headphones may prevent the driver
from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens,
which could result in a crash causing serious injury. Give your full
attention to driving and to the road.
You may purchase wired headphones for your FES (Family
Entertainment System). Plug them into the 3.5 mm headphone jack(s)
located on the left and right sides of the system. (Channel A is located
on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side.) These
headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode.
To listen to the audio on wired headphones (not included), connect the
wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD
system. The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left
side of the FES and is labeled
A. Headphones plugged into this
headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the
Channel A source. The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on
B. Headphones plugged into
the right side of the FES and is labeled
this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be
the Channel B source.
Adjust the headphone volume using
the volume control on the DVD
system.
Operation
Single play/Dual play
Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones
and wired headphones (not included) to allow the rear seat passengers
to listen to the radio (and other media sources) over the headphones.
This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of
sources a variety of ways.
82
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Single Play: Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening
to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers. When the
DVD system is on, and the same source is playing through the front and
rear speakers, SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display.
Dual Play: Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen
to a different playing media than the front seat passengers. With the
DVD and Rear Seat Controls turned ON, the rear seat passengers may
choose to listen to the radio, CD, MP3, DVD, DVD-AUX or SYNC威 (if
equipped) media sources over headphones while the front speakers play
the chosen selection for the front audio system, they may listen to
another over the headphones. DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio
display.
When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen
to the same audio source, SHARED MODE will appear on the radio.
Note: If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio, the rear seat
passengers can also listen to the radio; however, they will be limited to
listening to the same radio channel.
You can access dual play mode in any of the following ways:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system:
a. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is turned on. Inserting a DVD into
the system will automatically activate dual play mode.
b. Press the RADIO or MEDIA hard button on the navigation system.
Select the ‘Rear Zone’ tab on the touchscreen and select ‘On’ for the
headphones and ‘Enabled’ for the rear controls. To return to single
zone, select ‘Off’ for the headphones and ‘Disabled’ for the rear
controls.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a radio:
/ ) button on the remote
a.Press the headphone/speaker (
control or DVD system. Press again to return to single play mode.
b.Press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the radio at the same time.
Press again to return to single play mode.
The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the
A or B headphone control buttons will illuminate. The system can output
two different audio sources over the headphones. These are called
Channel A and Channel B. Both Channel A and Channel B can be
listened to on the wired headphones (not included) or on the infrared
(IR) wireless headphones.
83
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Press the Headphone Control button
A to change the audio source for
Channel A.
Press MEDIA to change the audio
source for Channel A. This
information will display on the DVD
system screen.
Press the Headphone Control button
B to change the audio source for
Channel B.
Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B. This information
will display on the DVD system screen. Channel B can listen to either
the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs (DVD-AUX).
(Reverse),
(Fast
When in Dual play mode, you can press
/
(Play/pause) to access different features in the
forward) or
various modes.
Operation with an aftermarket audio system
(Headphone only mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to
as “Headphone Only Mode”.
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A&B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
84
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Menu mode
Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if
available.
Press MENU twice to access the DVD set-up menu and the following
features:
1. ZOOM
2. ANGLE
3. ASPECT RATIO
4. LANGUAGE
5. SUB TITLES
Angle mode
Select ANGLE to select various
angles of view for the DVD.
This is disc dependent — some
DVD discs may have more viewing
angles to select from. Once you
have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm. The system
default is Angle 1.
Aspect ratio
Select ASPECT RATIO to select the
viewing size and shape of the video
displayed on the LCD screen. This is
disc dependent.
85
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
You can select from: WIDE, LETTER
BOX or PAN SCAN. Once you have
made your selection, press ENTER
to confirm. The LCD screen display
will immediately change to your
selection after the system resumes
playback of the DVD. The system
default is WIDE (16:9).
Language
Select LANGUAGE to select the
language you would like to use for
audio output (English, Spanish,
French). This is disc dependent.
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. The
system default is English.
Subtitles
Select SUBTITLES to turn the
subtitle option on or off. The system
default is OFF.
86
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. This is
disc dependent.
Audio CDs
To play audio CDs on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is on.
3. Insert an audio CD into the DVD system, label side up.
4. The track and elapsed time will
appear in the status bar. Use the
DVD cursor controls on the bezel to
highlight which track you would like
to play. You can also use the cursor
controls to highlight
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE or
SCAN. Once you have highlighted
the desired track or function, press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm
your selection.
COMP (Compression): Compression brings soft and loud CD passages
together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press to
turn the feature on/off.
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order.
Press again to stop.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current CD. Press
again to stop.
Playing MP3 discs
To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is on.
3. Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system, label side up.
87
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
4. The folder, track and elapsed
time will appear in the status bar.
The screen will list the Artist, Title,
Album and File Name.
COMP (Compression):
Compression brings soft and loud
CD/MP3 passages together for a
more consistent listening level when
in CD mode. Press to turn the feature on/off.
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current MP3 folder in random
order. Press again to stop.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder.
Press again to stop.
FOLDER LIST: Press access folder mode and to go to the previous/next
folder in the MP3 disc.
MP3 disc quality factors
Several factors can effect disc playback quality:
• Disc capacity — Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity.
We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of
storage.
• Disc type — Some CD-RW discs may operate inconsistently and may
cause an error message to appear. We recommend burning MP3 files
onto CD-R discs.
• Disc finalization — The disc may be left open for the purpose of
adding sessions to it at a later time, but be sure to close each session
or the disc will not play.
• Bit rate — The player supports bit rates from 32–320 kbps, as well as
variable bit rate MP3 files, but lower bit rates will have a noticeable
effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low
fidelity music material. We recommend that you encode MP3 files
using a high quality encoder.
• PC configuration — Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your
computer’s resources. Follow the PC configuration recommendations
of the encoder software vendor. We recommend that you avoid
running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding
to avoid undesirable noise and distortion.
88
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
CD, MP3 and CD player care
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
• Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player (if
equipped).
• Always store discs out of direct sunlight. Excessive heat may damage
or warp discs.
• Use care when handling and playing CD-R and CD-RW discs, which
are more susceptible to damage from heat, light and stress than are
regular CDs.
• Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat, with the
playing surface facing down, in order to prevent damage to the disc or
the player.
• Never insert any object other than a compact disc (CD) or digital
versatile disc (DVD) into the player, as doing so may damage the
player and may cause injury to you.
• Do not disassemble the player. The laser used in disc playback is
extremely harmful to the eyes.
The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed
12 cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs and digital versatile discs
(DVD), DVD-R and R/W discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD and DVD
players. Irregular shaped CDs or DVDs, CDs or DVDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the FES DVD
system. The label may peel and cause the CD or DVD to become
jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs or DVDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs. Please contact
your authorized dealer for further information.
Playing a DVD
1. Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode.
2. Ensure that the navigation system is on.
3. Insert a DVD label-side up into the system.
89
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
4. Use the DVD bezel controls to:
Press to play or pause a DVD.
Press to stop or eject a DVD.
Press and release to go to the
previous chapter. Press and hold for
a fast reverse search.
Press and release to go to the next
chapter. Press and hold for a fast
forward search.
Press when not in menu mode to
adjust brightness, or when in menu
mode to navigate through the menu
selections.
Press to adjust volume levels.
Slow play
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
2. Press and hold the reverse or
advance button to enter into slow
play mode. Once in slow play mode,
press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle
through 1/4 and 1/2. These will display on the status bar on top of the
screen as the screens cycle through at this rate.
Frame by frame
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
90
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. Press the right cursor button. The
DVD will advance one frame. Each
press of the right cursor button will
advance the DVD video by one
frame.
Headphone/auxiliary jacks
There are wired headphones (not included) and auxiliary jacks on the
left and right side of your DVD system. They can be used to plug in
wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices
such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette recorders,
etc.
On the left side of the system is the
Headphone A input jack. This
headphone will listen to the media
selected on the Channel A source.
When you need to make any
adjustments to the media, volume,
etc, ensure that the Channel A
source is highlighted.
Also located here are the various
auxiliary jacks which can be used to
plug in a VCR, camcorder, video
games, etc. The specific jacks are as follows:
1. Yellow: video input
2. White: left channel audio input
3. Red: right channel audio input
4. Black: wired headphone jack (not included)
The B headphone jack (5) is located
on the right side of the DVD system.
Plug in wired headphones (not
included) here.
Note: The B headphones can only
access DVD and AUX modes. They
cannot access radio sources.
91
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Audio displays
Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system. Status
messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status. Some
possible radio display messages:
• SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY
• DVD LOAD
• DVD MENU
• DVD STOP
Audio interaction
You can then also use the front audio controls to advance, reverse, play
and pause a DVD. While a DVD is playing you may use the following
controls on the front radio:
• SEEK: Press to advance to the previous (
chapters.
•
) or next (
) DVD
: Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD.
When the radio displays “DVD MENU”, press PLAY on the radio
(memory preset #6), to play the disc.
Parental control for the DVD system
Your Family Entertainment System (FES) allows you to have control
over the rear seat controls in a few different ways. The DVD system is
automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON, which allows the
rear seat passengers to use the DVD system.
There are three levels of control of
the FES buttons. The states are
FULL (enabled), LOCAL or
LOCKED (disabled). To change the level of control, press the memory
preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls. The
control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously.
The three states are described as:
FULL (enabled): The FES has control over the primary (speaker) and
secondary (headphone) audio sources.
LOCAL: The FES has control over the secondary source (headphones)
only. The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary
(speaker) audio source.
92
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
LOCKED (disabled): The FES buttons are locked and all FES button
presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject.
When the DVD system is ON, you
1
2
3
4
5
6
can then press the memory preset
controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to
toggle between Single Play and Dual Play. In Single Play mode, all
speakers listen to the same media. In Dual Play mode, rear seat
passengers can use the infrared wireless, or wired (not included)
headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat
passengers.
General information
Note: DVDs are formatted by
regions. US and Canada systems can
only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico
systems can only play region 4
DVDs. Systems sold in vehicles
targeted for other parts of the world
would have different regions. If a
playback problem is encountered,
please ensure that you are using a
disc designed for your vehicle. The
region coding can be found stamped
on the disc or on the box, and can say ‘region-1’ or ‘region 4’, etc. They
may also be marked by a numerical symbol.
Macrovision: This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
MP3: Supply of this product only conveys a license for private,
non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to
use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue generating) real time
broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and /or any other media)
broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in
other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or
audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit http:// www.mp3licensing.com.
93
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Safety information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the
system and retain for future reference.
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Family Entertainment
System (FES). See your dealer.
Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment.
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children operate the system while unsupervised. If
wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD)
flip-down screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the
glass breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of
contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.
WARNING: The driver should not attempt to operate any
function of the DVD system while the vehicle is in motion. Give
full attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road in a safe
place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system. A remote
control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to
operate the FES functions without distracting the driver.
Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive
periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal.
Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game
equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment
System (FES).
Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords
and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or
94
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation
of seats and/or compartments.
Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables
when not in use.
Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on
them or allow them to get wet or dirty.
Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene, lacquer thinner,
acetone, or any other solvent.
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln-Mercury could
void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference and radio
communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Care and service of the DVD player
Environmental extremes
DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may
be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these
outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to:
• extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• direct sunlight.
• high humidity.
• a dusty environment.
• locations where strong magnetic fields are generated.
Temperature extremes
When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold
place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the
vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system.
95
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Humidity and moisture condensation
Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely
humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one.
Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and/or player. If
moisture condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the
player. If one is already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON
to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or
more.
Foreign substances
Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD
player compartment. Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind
onto the media controls or into the system. If liquid is accidentally
spilled onto the system, immediately turn the system OFF and consult a
qualified service technician.
Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any
ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the
screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not
spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray
from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the
screen and cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while
cleaning the screen.
Cleaning DVD and CD discs
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the
center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion.
Compatibility with aftermarket audio systems
(headphone only mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the FES will work in a state referred to as “Headphone Only
Mode.” This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system,
without interface to the radio.
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
96
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A and B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the
Navigation System supplement for further information.
SYNC姞 (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC威, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC威 supplement or to the
SYNC威 section in the Navigation System supplement (if equipped).
97
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
(OFF): Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the back seats.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive in
(OFF) position.
the
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the airflow selector
(OFF). This allows the vehicle to breathe using the outside air
in
inlets.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
98
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
(IF EQUIPPED)
• Manual heating and air
conditioning system
• Manual heating and air
conditioning system with heated
mirrors
• Manual heating and air
conditioning system with heated
mirrors and heated seats
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
99
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
2. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents only to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor
vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. Can
be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield.
4.
(Recirculated air): Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation engages
automatically with selection of MAX A/C or can be engaged manually in
any other airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation may turn off
automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A/C.
5. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in MAX A/C,
and
.
(Heated mirrors): Press to turn the heated mirrors on and off.
6.
The heated mirrors turn off automatically after 10 minutes.
(Heated seats): Press to turn the heated seats on and off. The
7.
heated seats turn off when the ignition is turned off.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
position.
the air flow selector in the
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
air flow selector in the O (Off) position.
100
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C position, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (PARK) gear position
(automatic transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your
A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:
1. Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
2. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust in order to
maintain comfort.
To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
101
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC) SYSTEMS
(IF EQUIPPED)
• DATC
• DATC with heated mirrors
102
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
• DATC with heated seats and heated mirrors
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Units (English/Metric) under either Standard Message Center
or Optional Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter
, A/C,
,
In order to achieve maximum cooling performance, press
and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C) and the highest blower setting.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
1.
and demister vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the
select another mode.
windshield. To exit
2. Passenger temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
passenger side temperature in the vehicle cabin.
3A. Dual: (Single/dual electric temperature control): Allows the driver to
have full control of the cabin temperature settings (single zone) or
allows the passenger to have control of their individual temperature
settings (dual zone control). Press to turn on dual zone mode, press
again to return to single zone.
Heated mirrors: Press to defrost the outside rear view
3B.
mirrors. The heated mirrors will turn off after 10 minutes or can be
turned off by pressing the button again. Refer to Power mirrors in the
Driver Controls chapter for more information.
103
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
4.
Recirculation control: Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
(defrost).
engaged manually in any other airflow selection except
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except
MAX A/C.
5. A/C control: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
automatically in AUTO,
6. Manual override controls: Press this control to manually select
where you want the airflow directed. To return to full automatic control,
press AUTO.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor
7.
vents.
8.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
9.
vents.
10.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Fan speed control: Press to manually increase or decrease the
11.
fan speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
12. EXT: Press to display outside temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings.
13. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
14. Driver temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the driver
side temperature in the vehicle cabin.
15. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on
or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach
the desired temperature.
Heated seat controls: Press to turn the heated seats on and off.
16.
The heated seats turn off when the ignition is turned off.
104
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
position.
the air flow selector in the
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
engaged and A/C off.
system off, or with recirculated air
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out”.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the max A/C position, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (PARK) gear position
(automatic transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your
A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
Automatic operation:
1. Press AUTO for full automatic operation.
2. Do not override A/C or
(recirculated air).
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
Override operation:
1. Select air distribution.
(recirculated air). Use
(recirculated air) with
2. Select A/C and
A/C to provide colder airflow.
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
4. Set highest fan speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
105
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
In
(panel) or
(panel/floor) modes:
1. Move temperature control to full cold.
(recirculated air). Use recirculated air with A/C to
2. Select A/C and
provide colder airflow.
3. Set highest fan speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
106
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately
20 seconds or on vehicles equipped
with a message center, you can
select a delay from 0–180 seconds,
after the ignition switch is turned to
off.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to the off position.
Fog lamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
,
or
control is in the
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn fog lamps on. The fog lamp
will illuminate.
indicator light
107
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the on position,
• the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position and
• the parking brake must be disengaged.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
OFF
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
108
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
illuminated switches in the vehicle
during headlamp and parklamp
operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Note: If the battery is disconnected,
discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sealed beam or aerodynamic
headlamp system. Sealed beam headlamps may be aimed in the vertical
(up/down) and the horizontal (left/right) directions using the procedures
following. The aerodynamic headlamps can only be aimed in the vertical
direction (up/down) using the procedures following. The headlamps on
your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant and should not
normally need adjusting.
109
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Vertical and horizontal aim adjustment (sealed beam headlamps)
The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using
mechanical aimers. If mechanical aimers are used and the cross-car sight
line is in any way blocked, set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the
same setting, such that the cross-car sight line is no longer blocked, per
the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used. You can also
aim the headlamps visually using the procedure below.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park your vehicle on a level
surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away from a vertical plain surface
(3). Check your headlamp alignment
at night or in a dark area so that
you can see the headlamp beam
pattern.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
• (5) Center of headlamps
• (6) Center line of the vehicle
2. The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens (a circle or
cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp (mark or
feature). Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the
ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long horizontal line on the
wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.
4. Locate the high intensity area of
the beam pattern and place the top
edge of the intensity zone even with
the horizontal reference line (4). If
the top edge of the high intensity
area is not even with the horizontal
line, follow the next step to adjust
it.
110
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
5. Locate the vertical adjuster (2)
for each headlamp. Adjust the aim
by turning the adjuster control
either clockwise (to adjust up) or
counterclockwise (to adjust down).
6. In addition to the horizontal line
marked in step 2, a pair of vertical
lines (5) must be marked at the
center line of the headlamps on the
wall or screen.
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the
vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If the left
edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line, follow
the next step to adjust it.
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster (1) for each headlamp. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise, to place the left edge of the high
intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp
under adjustment.
Vertical aim adjustment (aerodynamic headlamps)
The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted. Your
vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
111
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape
works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. Cover one of the
headlamps so no light from that lamp hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a E5 Torx
socket to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise (to adjust down)
or clockwise (to adjust up) aligning
the upper edge of the light pattern
up to the horizontal line.
6. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
112
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
MAP LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The dome lamp turns on when:
• any door is opened,
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
off.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
113
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Function
Number Trade number
of bulbs
2
H13/9008
2
H6054
2
3157A or 3157AK
2
3157
2
194
2
3157
2
3157
Headlamps (aerodynamic)
Headlamps (sealed beam)
Park lamp with aerodynamic headlamp
Park lamp with sealed beam headlamp
Sidemarker
Tail/stop/turn/sidemarker (pick-up only)
Tail/stop/turn/sidemarker (chassis cabs
only; if equipped)
Back-up (pick-ups only)
2
921
Back-up (chassis cabs only)
2
3157
High-mount stoplamp
1
922
Fog lamp
2
9145
License plate lamp
2
194
Cargo lamp
2
906
Mirror turn signal
2
2825
Mirror clearance lamp
2
2825
*Front clearance lamps (2) and front
5
194
identification lamps (3)
*Rear fender clearance
4
194
Interior visor lamp (if equipped)
4
194
*Rear identification
3
194
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
* Dual rear wheels, or if equipped.
114
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing headlamp bulbs (aerodynamic)
1. Make sure that the headlamps are off, then open the hood.
2. Remove the bolts from the top,
side and bottom of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Pull the assembly straight out
disengaging two snap clips from the
fender.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector by squeezing the release
tab and pushing the connector
forward, then pulling it rearward.
5. Remove the bulb assembly by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
115
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing park/turn and sidemarker lamp bulbs (aerodynamic)
1. Make sure that the headlamps are off, then open the hood.
2. Remove the bolts from the top, side and bottom of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Pull the assembly straight out.
4. Remove the bulb assembly,
sidemarker or park/turn bulb by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
5. Pull the old bulb out from the
socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing headlamp bulbs (sealed beam)
1. Make sure that the headlamps are off, then open the hood.
2. Remove the three screws and one
bolt from the top and bottom of the
park lamp/bezel assembly.
3. Remove the four screws and the
headlamp retaining ring from
headlamp.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the headlamp.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
116
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing park/turn/sidemarker bulbs (sealed beam)
1. Make sure that the headlamps are off, then open the hood.
2. Remove the three screws and one bolt from the top and bottom of the
park lamp/bezel assembly.
3. Pull the assembly straight out disengaging snap clip.
4. Remove the bulb assembly,
sidemarker or park/turn by turning
it counterclockwise. (Top view of
assembly shown.)
5. Pull the old bulb out from the
socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing brake/tail/turn/back-up lamp bulbs - Pick-ups only
1. Make sure the headlamps are off,
then open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assemblies.
2. Remove the two bolts from the
tail lamp assembly and carefully pull
the lamp assembly from the tailgate
pillar by releasing the two retaining
tabs.
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
117
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing brake/tail/turn/back-up lamp bulbs - Chassis cabs only
(if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the four screws and the
lamp lens from lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
Replacing cargo lamp and high-mount brakelamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the screws and lamp
assembly from vehicle as wiring
permits.
3. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Replacing front clearance and identification lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the screw and lens from
the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Install the bulb(s) in reverse order.
118
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
fog lamp by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
119
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When the wiper control is set on the
intermittent settings, the speed of the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Press the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick press and hold: the
wipers will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long press and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper rainlamp feature (if equipped with Autolamp)
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
120
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TILT STEERING WHEEL
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering up or down
until you find the desired location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle
is moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package. If your vehicle is equipped with a moon roof, refer
to Moon roof later in this chapter for information on its operation.
121
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Storage compartment (if equipped)
Press the release on the door to
open the storage compartment.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object and the front tab can
be used for holding tickets, paper,
envelopes, etc. The front bin may be
used to store small objects.
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
• Utility compartment with
cassette/CD holder
• Coin holder
• Pen holder
• Writing surface
• A power point inside the utility
compartment and on the rear of
the console
• Laptop storage
• Hanging file folder supports
• Rear cupholders (Crew Cab only)
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
122
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Center console/under-seat storage-Cabela’s Edition (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a lockable compartment in the center
console and a lockable storage area under the rear seats.
Center console storage
Use the vehicle’s ignition key to
lock/unlock the compartment.
Under-seat storage
Flip the rear seat cushion up to
access the rear under-seat storage
area. See Seating in the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter for
more information.
Use the vehicle’s ignition key to
lock/unlock the compartment.
Release the lid latches to open the
storage area.
123
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet for this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:
• On the instrument panel
• On the rear of the center console (if equipped) (SuperCab and Crew
Cab models)
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
124
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to
three inches.
One-touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
Window lock (if equipped)
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s) press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
Power rear slider window (if equipped)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
125
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
power rear slide window, the switch
is located on the instrument panel
behind the right-hand side of the
steering wheel.
• Press the right side of the control
to open the window.
• Pull the right side of the control
to close the window.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position or until
either front door is opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror which
has an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will
change from the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare
(darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the
mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically
adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear
view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance.
126
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system (RCS), a video image
will display in the mirror or the navigation system (if equipped) when
the vehicle is put in (R) Reverse. As you shift into any other gear from R
(Reverse), the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn off.
Refer to Rearview camera system (RCS) in the Driving chapter.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors (if equipped)
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
The spotter mirror below the main glass (if equipped) must be adjusted
manually.
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
The main mirror glass and lower
convex spotter mirror are heated to
remove ice, mist and fog. To activate
the heated mirrors, press the heated
located on the
mirror control
climate control panel. The heated
mirrors will operate for 10 minutes,
then automatically shut off (or shut
off when the engine is turned off).
In cases of extreme ice and cold,
the heater control may need
pressing again after 10 minutes in order to fully clear the glass.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
re-adjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
127
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully before driving through a narrow space,
like an automatic car wash.
Powerfold mirrors
If equipped with powerfold mirrors,
you can fold the side mirrors
simultaneously using the power
mirror switch.
To operate the powerfold mirrors:
1. Rotate the switch to the center/neutral position.
2. Momentarily pull the switch rearward to auto fold in.
3. Momentarily pull the switch rearward again to fold back to design
position.
Note: When powerfolding the mirrors, it is normal to hear the sound of
the motors.
Powerfold mirror positions, from left to right: Position 1, Position 2,
Position 3
The powerfold mirrors may be folded forward/rearward manually to any
of the three positions shown and electrically to positions 1 and 2 only. If
a mirror is folded manually forward to position 3, you must manually fold
it back to position 1 or 2 in order for the powerfold function to continue
functioning. Note: Although it is possible to electrically fold the mirror
from position 3 to 2, it was not designed for this functionality and may
not always work under all conditions.
128
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: Ten or more switch activations within one minute, or repeated
fold/unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during the
full travel may cause the system to disable the fold/unfold function to
protect the motors from overheating. Should this occur, wait approximately
31⁄2 minutes for the system to reset and function to return to normal.
Note: The powerfold mirrors are designed to operate while the vehicle is
stationary or traveling at moderate speeds. If you attempt to powerfold
the mirrors at high speeds, they may not fully fold forward/rearward slow down and powerfold or manually fold the mirrors in order to
complete the fold operation.
Note: If the power fold/telescope mirror glass appears loose or vibrates
when driving, it is possible that the mirrors have been manually folded or
telescoped. To minimize the vibration, ensure that the mirrors are
electronically folded and telescoped in/out with the switches on the door
trim panel. If the power fold mirrors are out of sync, electronically
powerfold the mirrors to re-sync the motors. This will cause a loud “click”
and the mirrors will jerk during re-synchronization. This is normal.
Telescoping mirrors (if equipped)
The telescoping feature allows the
mirror to extend approximately
2.75 inches (70 mm). This feature is
especially useful to the driver when
towing a trailer. Mirrors can be
manually pulled out or pushed in to
the desired telescopic position.
If equipped with power telescoping
mirrors, you can simultaneously
position both mirrors using the
power telescope switch found on
the door trim panel.
• To telescope the mirrors
outboard, press and hold the left
side of the power telescope
switch until the mirrors reach their desired position. When the end of
travel is reached, it is normal to hear the power telescoping motors
running as long as you continue to hold the switch.
129
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• To telescope the mirrors inboard, press and hold the right side of the
power telescope switch until the mirrors reach their desired position.
Memory mirrors (if equipped)
This system allows automatic positioning of the outside rearview mirrors.
For more information on this feature, refer to Memory seats/power
mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter.
Mirror mounted side turn signal indicator (if equipped)
When the vehicle turn signals are
activated, the outer portion of the
mirror housing will blink amber.
The turn signal feature can be seen
by other drivers who may approach
from the rear of the vehicle.
Clearance lamps (if equipped)
Illuminates when the headlamps or
parking lamps are switched on.
This provides additional visibility of
your vehicle to other drivers on the
road.
130
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal
toward you or away from you.
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved when doing a
memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle
personality features when a memory position is selected through the
remote entry transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the
driver’s door (if equipped with memory feature). Refer to Memory
seats/power mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
131
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
on the
5. The indicator light
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
132
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press the RES (resume) control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET + control.
133
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will not erase your vehicle’s previously
set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
Audio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2
• CD (if equipped)
• DVD (if equipped)
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode, if equipped).
• LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack)
134
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:
SEEK
to
• Press
select preset stations within the
selected radio band or press and
hold to select the next/previous
radio frequency.
In Satellite radio mode (if
equipped):
SEEK
to
• Press
advance through preset channels or subscribed channels.
In CD mode:
SEEK
to select the next selection on the CD or
• Press
press and hold to forward or reverse the CD.
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or − to adjust
volume.
Navigation system hands free
control features (if equipped)
Press and hold VOICE briefly until
icon appears on the
the voice
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
Press VOICE to complete a voice
command.
For further information on the
Navigation system, refer to the
Navigation System supplement.
135
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
SYNC威 system hands free
control feature (if equipped)
Press VOICE briefly until the
icon appears on the display
voice
to use the voice command feature.
You will hear a tone and LISTENING
will appear in the radio display.
Press and hold VOICE to exit voice
command.
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press and hold
to end call or exit phone mode.
to scroll through various menus and selections. Press
Press
OK to confirm your selection.
For further information on the SYNC威 system, refer to the SYNC威
supplement.
Navigation system/SYNC威 hands
free control features (if
equipped)
Press VOICE briefly until the
icon appears on the
voice
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press and
to exit phone mode or end
hold
call.
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC威 system, refer to
the Navigation System and SYNC威 supplements.
136
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
UPFITTER CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
the Upfitter option package which
will provide four switches, mounted
in the center of the instrument
panel, labeled AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3
and AUX 4. These switches will only
operate while the ignition is in the
on position, whether the engine is
running or not. It is, however, recommended that the engine remain
running to maintain battery charge when using the Upfitter switches for
extended duration or higher current draws. (This is even more important
for vehicles with diesel engines since the glow plugs are also draining
battery power when the ignition key is in the on position.)
When switched on by the operator they provide 10 amps, 15 amps or
30 amps of electrical battery power for a variety of personal or
commercial uses.
If your vehicle is equipped with this option, there will also be a relay box
located on the driver side end of the instrument panel. See your
authorized dealer for service.
The relays are coded as shown in
RELAY
the accompanying illustration.
4
RELAY
3
RELAY
2
RELAY
1
137
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
There will also be one power lead
for each switch found as a blunt-cut
and sealed wire located below the
instrument panel and to the left of
the steering column.
They are coded as follows:
Switch
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
Circuit number
Wire color
CAC05
Yellow
CAC06
Green with
Brown Trace
CAC07
Violet with
Green Trace
CAC08
Brown
Fuse
30A
30A
10A
15A
More detailed information about Upfitter switches can be found at
https://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The moon roof control is located on the overhead console.
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
Note: The moon roof will open to
the “comfort” position first before
opening all the way. The “comfort”
position helps to alleviate rumbling
wind noise which may happen in the
vehicle with the roof fully opened.
To open the moon roof: The moon
roof is equipped with a one-touch
open feature. Press and release
control. The moon roof will open to the “comfort” position. Press
the
138
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
and release the control again to fully open. To stop the one-touch open
feature, press either the
or
control again.
WARNING: When closing the moon roof, you should verify that
it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.
control until the glass
To close the moon roof: Press and hold the
panel stops at the “comfort” position. Press and hold the control again
until the glass stops moving (the moon roof does not go to the comfort
position). When fully closed, the rear portion of the glass panel will
appear higher than the front portion.
control. The moon
To vent the moon roof: Press and hold the
roof must be in the closed position in order to move it into the
control until the glass
vent position. To close, press and hold the
panel stops moving.
The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually opened
or closed when the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward
the front of the vehicle.
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
WARNING: When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless
Control System to a garage door or gate, be sure that people and
objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
139
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
accessory position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威.
It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located
on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink威 and
hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink威 indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents.
3. Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink威 button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink威 button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 4 through
6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
140
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 1 in this section.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink威 at
www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Step 1 outlined in
the Programming section, replace
Step 2 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 2 in the
Programming section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section.
141
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be
programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming
section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
142
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
tailgate lock designed to help
prevent theft of the tailgate.
• Insert ignition key and turn to the
right to engage lock.
• Turn ignition key to the left to
unlock.
Tailgate removal
Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading.
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting
cargo or cargo falling from vehicle, which could result in
compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle
occupants or others.
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system (RCS), do Steps 1
through 3 before removing the tailgate.
1. Before removal of the tailgate,
locate and disconnect the tailgate
in-line connector under the pickup
box on the passenger side of the
vehicle near the spare tire.
2. Install a protective cap (located
in the glove box) onto the in-line
RCS connector that remains under
the pickup box.
3. Partially lower tailgate and
carefully feed tailgate harness up through the gap between the pickup
box and the bumper. Place the tailgate harness out of the way under the
pickup box.
143
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
4. Lower the tailgate.
5. Using a screwdriver, gently pry
the spring clip (on each connector)
past the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
7. Lift tailgate to a 45-degree angle
from horizontal.
8. Lift right side off of its hinge.
9. Lift tailgate to a 80-degree angle from horizontal.
10. Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Tailgate step (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a feature that allows easier entry into
the truck bed. To open the tailgate step:
1. Flip down the tailgate.
2. Pull the yellow latch lever to the
unlock positon ( ) to release the
grab handle from its stowed postion
and raise the handle upright until
you feel it latch and see the latch
lever in the lock positon ( ). The
yellow lever only needs to be used
when releasing the grab handle.
3. Rotate the center molding to
unlatch the tailgate step and pull it
towards you to extend it.
4. Flip open the step panel to widen
the step.
Note: To reduce risk of falling:
• Operate step only when the
vehicle is on level surface.
• Operate step only in areas with
sufficient lighting
• Always open flip panel to widen step.
144
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Always use grab handle when stepping up and down.
• Step not intended for bare-footed use.
• Keep step clean from contamination before use (e.g. snow, mud)
• Keep the step load (you + load) below 350 lb (159 kg).
• Never drive with step deployed.
To close the tailgate step:
1. Close the step panel, then lift and fully close the tailgate step into the
tailgate.
2. Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle, then lower the handle.
Note:
• Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle.
• Never drive with the step or grab handle deployed.
• Replace slip resistance tape (serviceable item) if worn out.
• Replace handle molding (serviceable item) if damaged.
• Do not tow with grab handle or step frame.
Bed extender (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management feature in the
truck bed.
Note: This feature is not intended for off-road usage.
To open the bed extender into tailgate mode:
1. Pull the locking pin toward the
center of the vehicle.
145
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
2. Open the latches to release the
panels.
3. Rotate the panels toward the
tailgate.
Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other side of the bed extender.
4. Connect the two panels, then rotate both knobs a quarter-turn
clockwise to secure the panels.
146
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
5. Ensure the latch rod is inserted
into the tailgate hole and the locking
pins on both sides are engaged into
their holes in the pick-up box.
6. Reverse steps for storage of the
bed extender.
Note: When the vehicle is in motion, ensure the locking pins and knobs
are fully engaged.
Note: Ensure all cargo is secured.
Note: When the vehicle is in motion, the tailgate load must not exceed
150 lb (68 kg).
Note: The bed extender should always be kept in the grocery mode or
stowed position with the tailgate closed when not being used for the
purpose of restraining cargo in the tailgate mode.
To open the bed extender into grocery mode, follow Steps 1–4 by
rotating the panels away from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
147
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a
second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an
emergency.
If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock威 Passive Anti-theft
system, your keys are electronically coded to your vehicle; using a
non-coded key will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your
dealer supplied keys, replacement keys are available through your
authorized dealer.
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press control to unlock all doors.
Press control to lock all doors.
Smart locks (if equipped)
This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your
key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door
will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the
ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, by
simultaneously pressing button 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls on the
button on the
remote entry keypad (if equipped), or using the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
148
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Autolock feature (if equipped)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the on position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for greater
than two seconds.
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
greater than two seconds.
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
There are four methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock procedure,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Optional message center in the Driver controls chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
149
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry keypad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the off
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature (if equipped)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
off ) or accessory position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the off or accessory position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
There are three methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
150
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped)
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the off
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
151
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Move lock control up to engage
the childproof lock.
• Move lock control down to
disengage the childproof lock.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
152
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:
• unlock the vehicle doors without
a key.
• lock all the vehicle doors without
a key.
• activate the personal alarm.
If there are problems with the
remote entry system, make sure to
take ALL remote entry
transmitters with you to your
authorized dealer in order to aid in
troubleshooting the problem.
Two step door unlocking
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The parking
lamps and interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry
feature later in this section) if the control on the overhead lamp is not
set to the off position.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to unlock the
passenger doors.
The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to the off position.
One step door unlocking
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press
and release
once to unlock all of the doors. Note: The parking lamps and interior
lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this
section) if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position.
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled. Unlocking can be
switched between two step and one step door unlocking by pressing and
holding both the
and
buttons simultaneously on the remote entry
transmitter for approximately four seconds. The hazard lamps will flash
twice to indicate that the vehicle has switched to one step unlocking.
Repeat the procedure to switch back to two-step unlocking.
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The parking lamps will
illuminate if all the doors are closed and locked.
153
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the
horn will chirp once, and the parking lamps will illuminate once more.
If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick
chirps and the parking lamps will not flash.
Car finder
Press
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to on to
deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off
position.
Memory seats/adjustable pedals/mirrors (if equipped)
The remote entry system can also control the memory seat/adjustable
pedals/mirrors.
Press
to automatically move the seat, adjustable pedals and mirrors to
the desired memory position (the seat position corresponds to the
transmitter being used).
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat, adjustable pedals and mirrors to the position
desired.
2. Press and hold either memory 1
button or memory 2 button for five
seconds. A tone will be heard after
11⁄2 seconds when the memory store
is done, continue to hold until a
second tone is heard after five
seconds.
3. Within three seconds press
button on the keyfob.
the
The keyfob unlock will now recall
the memory position.
154
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Deactivating the memory feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press and hold either memory 1 button or memory 2 button for five
seconds. A tone will be heard after 11⁄2 seconds when the memory store
is done, continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds.
2. Within three seconds press the
button on the keyfob
The keyfob unlock will not recall the memory position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local
regulations when disposing of
transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct
orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that the
battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
155
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the memory seats/power
mirrors/adjustable pedals feature, you can associate a remote entry
transmitter to each memory position using this procedure. The first
transmitter that is programmed will recall Driver 1 settings, and the
second transmitter that is programmed will recall Driver 2 settings.
How to program your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote keyless entry keypads and remote entry
transmitters (maximum of four) available before beginning this
procedure. Note: Do not press the brake pedal anytime during this
sequencing, as doing so will invalidate the procedure.
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle eight times rapidly (within
10 seconds) between the off
position and on.
Note: The eighth turn must end in
the on position. The doors will lock,
then unlock, to confirm that the programming mode has been activated.
4. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that
this remote entry transmitter has been programmed.
5. Repeat Step 4 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
6. Turn the ignition to the off position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters.
Note: After 20 seconds, you will automatically exit the programming
mode. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
156
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the on position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls on the keyless entry keypad are
pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the off position, 10 minutes after if the dome
lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left on.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to lock or unlock the doors
without using a key.
The keypad can be operated with
the factory set 5–digit entry code;
this code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is
marked on the computer module, and is available from your authorized
dealer. You can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory seats, mirrors and pedals
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
157
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit
to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the
personal entry code:
• Pressing 1 • 2 recalls Driver 1 settings.
• Pressing 3 • 4 recalls Driver 2 settings.
• Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a
sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory
setting.
5. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your personal
keycode has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If an incorrect code has been entered seven times (35 consecutive
button presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during
this time.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the
control on the remote entry transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the on position.
158
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate after entering a valid keypad
entry code.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.
SECURILOCK姞 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
159
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles equipped with the
SecuriLock威 Passive Anti-theft
system behave as follows:
• When the ignition is in the off
position, the indicator will flash once every two seconds for a total of
10 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock威 system is functioning as a
theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and
the SecuriLock威 Passive Anti-theft system has enabled the engine.
Vehicles without the SecuriLock威 Passive Anti-theft system behave as
follows:
• When the ignition is in the off position, the indicator will not flash.
• When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds to indicate the engine is enabled.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off
position.
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds to act as a theft
deterrent when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the
vehicle.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
160
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock威 keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from
the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 3
(on) position for at least one
second, but no more than
10 seconds).
2. Turn ignition from the 3 (on)
position back to the 1 (off) position
in order to remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
3. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the first coded
key, insert the second previously programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second
but no more than 10 seconds).
4. Turn the ignition from the 3 (on) position back to the 1 (off) position
in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the second
coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into
the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second,
but no more than 10 seconds). This step will program your new key to a
coded key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat Steps 1
through 5.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
161
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer
to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
park/turn lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is removed from the
ignition. Either of the following actions will prearm the alarm system:
• Press the
control on the remote entry transmitter.
• Open a door and press the power door lock control to lock all the
doors, and then close the door.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
control on your remote entry
• Unlock the doors by pressing the
transmitter.
• Turn the ignition to the on position with a programmed coded ignition
key.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if any door or hood is opened
without using the key or the remote entry transmitter.
162
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Non-adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard non-adjustable head
restraints.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the seatback is placed in its proper
position. The driver should never adjust the seatback while the vehicle
is in motion.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of a trimmed foam covering
over the upper structure of the
seatback.
Properly adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position, so that
the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your
head.
163
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Full bench seat (if equipped)
• Lift the release bar to move the
seat forward or backward. Ensure
that the seat is relatched into
place.
• Pull up on the lever located at
the bottom of the seatback to
quickly fold the seatback forward.
• Pull up on the lever located at
the side of the seat cushion to
recline the seatback and to return
the seat to the upright position.
40/20/40 split bench seat (if equipped)
• Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or backward.
Ensure the seat is relatched into
place.
• Pull the handle on the side of the
seat up to recline the seat.
• Push down the lever located at
the bottom of the seatback to
quickly fold the seatback forward.
164
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
40/20/40 front seat armrest and console (if equipped)
To release the armrest, pull forward
on the strap and pull the armrest
down.
To gain access to the storage
compartment in your armrest, lift
the latch to open the lid. The lid
cannot be opened in the upright
position.
Lift up armrest to return it to a
center seatback.
165
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Captain’s chair (if equipped)
• Lift the bar to move the seat
forward or rearward. Make sure
that the seat is relatched into
place.
• To recline the seatback, pull the
release lever handle located on
the side of the seat up.
• Push down the lever (if
equipped) located at the bottom
of the seatback to quickly fold the
seatback forward.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid
injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
166
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press front to raise or lower the
front portion of the seat cushion.
Press rear to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Using the manual lumbar support
The lumbar support control is
located on the outboard side of the
seat
Turn the lumbar support clockwise
for more support.
Turn the lumbar support
counterclockwise for less support.
167
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Heated seats (if equipped)
The heated seat control is located on the climate control panel.
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
To operate the heated seats, do the following (engine must be running):
Press
to activate; push
again to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated.
Memory seats/power mirrors/adjustable pedals (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat, power
mirrors, and adjustable pedals to
two programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
To save memory positions:
1. Place the key in the ignition to
move the features to the drive
position.
2. Move all the memory features to the desired positions.
3. Press and hold one of the memory buttons for approximately two
seconds.
4. A tone will be heard when the memory save is complete.
168
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To recall a memory position:
• Press and release either memory 1 button or memory 2 button.
A position can be recalled:
• in any gearshift position if the ignition is not in the on position.
• only in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the ignition is in the on position.
A memory seat position may be programmed at any time.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote
(unlock) control (if the transmitter is programmed
entry transmitter
to a memory position) or, when you enter a valid personal entry code
that is programmed to a memory position.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for
more information on how to use the keypad, refer to Remote entry
system in the Locks and Security chapter.
REAR SEATS
Adjustable head restraints (if equipped)
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down. Lift the head restraint
so that it is located directly or as
close as possible behind your head.
169
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Push control to lower head restraint.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
Cabela’s姞 seat
If your vehicle is equipped with a Cabela’s seat, you will not have the
load floor option. A lockable stowage box is located under the rear seat.
For more information on the stowage box, see Center
console/under-seat storage-Cabela’s edition in the Driver controls
chapter.
Rear folding seat system with load floor (if equipped)
The rear seatback has a split 60/40 seat. Each seat cushion can be
flipped up into the seatback position.
Note: The Crew Cab rear 60/40 split bench seatback is not intended to
support a cargo load in the forward-folded position.
To fold the seatback down, pull
down the latch lever located on the
bottom seatback to fold the
seatback forward.
170
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To flip the seat cushion up, pull
up on the lever located on the side
of the seat cushion to rotate the
cushion up until it locks into a
vertical storage position, gaining
access to the grocery hook located
on the underside of the driver-side
seat cushion. The maximum load is
25 lb. (11 kg).
Returning the seat to seating position
• Pull lever on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from storage
position.
• Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
To gain access to the cupholders
and tray, pull down on the armrest.
171
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To gain access to the 60/40 load
floor, store the cushion in the
upright locked position. Pull up on
the straps located at the sides of the
load floor, and rotate forward until
resting on the carpet.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
172
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
173
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Vehicle sensitive mode
Combination lap and shoulder belts in normal retractor mode allow free
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Belt sensitive mode
Combination lap and shoulder belts can also be made to lock manually by
quickly pulling on the shoulder belt.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat (except a
booster) is installed in a passenger front or outboard rear seating
position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety
restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
174
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the front passenger and
rear outboard safety belt systems must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor”
feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety
belts should be checked for proper function.
175
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Energy management feature
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• The front outboard safety belt systems have a retractor assembly that
is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt retractor pretensioners at the
driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are
designed to activate only during certain frontal or near-frontal collisions
with sufficient longitudinal deceleration. A safety belt pretensioner is a
device which tightens the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts during
some collisions in such a way that they fit more snugly against the body.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under
the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in
the event of a collision.
176
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front safety belt height adjustment
The front outboard seating positions are equipped with safety belt height
adjusters.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down. Release the
button and pull down on the height
adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
Safety belt with cinch tongue (Regular cab center seating position
and Super Cab/Crew Cab rear center seating positions)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt
is stowed or while putting safety belts on. When the lap/shoulder safety
belt is buckled, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be
shortened, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting
longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always
wear the shoulder belt properly and don’t allow any slack in either the
lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt
having a cinch tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap
belt portion of it.
177
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
some webbing out of the shoulder
belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below
the tongue, grasp the tip (metal
portion) of the tongue so that it is
parallel to the webbing and slide the
tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the
buckle.
How to fasten the cinch tongue (Regular cab center seating
position and Super Cab/Crew Cab rear center seating positions)
1. Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that
the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and
chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on
the tongue.
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the safety belt will become locked and help reduce
your forward movement.
178
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Lap belts
Adjusting the lap belt
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.
• 1st row center seating position on SuperCab and Crew Cab
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits
snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
179
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator light
is illuminated and the warning
chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph (5 km/h)
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has
been turned to the on position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the safety belt
indicator light is illuminated and
the safety belt warning chime is
sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
180
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates
and the warning chime sounds for
6 seconds every 30 seconds, repeating
for approximately 5 minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for good
drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously
injured in a crash during our
lifetime.
“I’m not going far”
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable”
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try
different positions for the safety belt
upper anchorage and seatback which
should be as upright as possible; this
can improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry”
Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t work”
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light”
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
“The people I’m with don’t wear Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
belts”
times more often in vehicles with TWO
or MORE people. Children and younger
brothers/sisters imitate behavior they
see.
181
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
“I have an airbag”
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Consider...
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely to
DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection,
WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”.
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag
system.
One-time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition
on cycle, the Belt-Minder威 will be disabled for that ignition cycle only.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature (Driver only)
The Belt-Minder威 feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that the following conditions
are met:
• the parking brake is set
• the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission)
• the ignition switch is in the off position
• all vehicle doors are closed
• the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
• the parklamps/headlamps are in the off position (If the vehicle is
equipped with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure)
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
182
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Belt-Minder威 activation and deactivation procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. (DO NOT START THE
ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately
1 minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 60 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times at a moderate speed,
ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
• After Step 3 is complete, the safety belt warning light will be turned
on for 3 seconds.
• If Step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds at the end of Step 3,
Belt-Minder威 will automatically exit programming mode without
changing its enable status.
4. Within 7 seconds of the light turning on, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per
second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per
second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the light off, then
followed by the safety belt warning light flashing 4 times per second
for 3 seconds again.
5. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
183
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
184
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.
Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
WARNING: Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment
may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the
risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.
185
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
For additional important safety information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision.
WARNING: An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of
serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear
facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless
the passenger airbag is turned off. See Passenger airbag ON/OFF
switch.
WARNING: Front seating positions only: If seating two adults
and a child, Ford recommends properly restraining the child in
the center front seating position, but only if doing so will not interfere
with driving the vehicle. This arrangement provides lap and shoulder
belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment
method for a child restraint. If the child seat interferes with driving the
vehicle and the child restraint is forward-facing, the child may be
restrained in the passenger seat. Move the seat as far rearward as
possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front
passenger airbag. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. Always properly restrain all occupants, including the
child in an appropriate child seat or booster.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
186
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags),
• one or more impact and safing sensors,
• a readiness light and tone
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
187
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the
horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact
that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy威) or
the safety belt pretensioners.
The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are
taken by the driver or any other person:
• pressing the hazard control button,
• or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
See authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
188
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch (if equipped)
WARNING: An airbag
ON/OFF switch (if
equipped) may be installed in this
vehicle. Before driving, always
look at the face of the switch to
be sure the switch is in the proper
position in accordance with these
instructions and warnings. Failure
to put the switch in a proper
position can increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a
collision.
Turning the passenger airbag off
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch to OFF position and hold in
OFF position while removing the
key.
2. When the ignition is turned to the
ON position the OFF light
illuminates briefly, momentarily
shuts off and then turns back on.
This indicates that the passenger
airbag is deactivated.
WARNING: If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air
bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in
ON, have the passenger air bag switch serviced at your authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING: In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the
switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air
bag ON/OFF switch.
189
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of
serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear
facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless
the passenger airbag is turned off.
Turning the passenger airbag back on
The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the switch to ON.
2. The OFF light will briefly
illuminate when the ignition is
turned to On. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is operational.
WARNING: If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger
airbag switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in
ON, have the passenger airbag switch serviced at your authorized
dealer immediately.
The passenger side airbag should always be ON (the airbag OFF light
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the
NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
WARNING: The safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to
function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When
you turn OFF your airbag, you not only lose the protection of the
airbag, you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt
system, which was designed to work with the airbag. If you are not a
person who meets the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport
Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a collision.
190
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport
children who are 12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use
safety belts and child restraints properly. DO NOT place a child in a
rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped
with an airbag ON/OFF switch and the passenger airbag is turned OFF.
This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating
airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag
inflates is substantial.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an
airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life
threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force
can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a
front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the
overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the
protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to
work as a safety system with the airbags.
Read all airbag warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other
important airbag instructions and warnings in this Owner’s Guide.
NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada)
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
191
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
• the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash.
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents
to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the
risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a
crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt
might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA
deactivation criteria.
Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only)
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
192
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
• the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
• poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents
to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the
risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a
crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt
might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA
deactivation criteria.
193
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and your pediatrician to make sure your child seat
is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and properly
installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST
contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet at
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. Failure to properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
Recommended
age
restraint type
Infants
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or Use a child safety seat
or
less (generally age four or
(sometimes called an
toddlers younger)
infant carrier,
convertible seat, or
toddler seat).
194
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
Recommended
age
restraint type
Small
Children who have outgrown or no Use a belt-positioning
children longer properly fit in a child safety booster seat.
seat (generally children who are
less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than
age four (4) and less than age
twelve (12), and between 40 lbs
(18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lbs (45 kg) if
recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer)
Larger
Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap belt
children longer properly fit in a
snug and low across the
belt-positioning booster seat
hips, shoulder belt
(generally children who are at
least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) centered across the
shoulder and chest, and
tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg)
or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended seatback upright.
by child restraint manufacturer)
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
195
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Note: This vehicle is not equipped with LATCH lower anchors.
Restraint
Type
Rear
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
Safety
(lower (lower
belt
belt and belt
Child anchors anchors and
LATCH
only
Weight and
only)
top
(lower
top
tether anchors
tether
anchor and top
anchor)
tether
anchor)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
X
(21 kg)
Over
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If
all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
196
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
197
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov.
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
198
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Installing child safety seats with automatic locking mode
combination lap and shoulder belts
(front passenger and rear outboard seating positions)
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Installing the child safety seat
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat in the
outboard combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
199
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
WARNING: An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless
the passenger airbag switch is turned off, See Passenger airbag on/off
switch.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
200
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Make sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.
5. Put the safety belt in the
automatic locking mode. To do so,
grasp the shoulder portion of the
belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
201
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the
child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with
tether straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Installing child safety seats in cinch tongue combination lap and
shoulder belt seating positions (Regular Cab front center and
Super/Crew cab rear center positions)
The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination
lap/shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder
belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING: Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the
Regular Cab center seating position if applicable.
202
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in
the center seat.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
front of an active airbag.
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
3. While holding both shoulder and
lap portions next to the tongue,
route the tongue and webbing
through the child seat according to
the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure that the belt
webbing is not twisted.
203
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle for that seating
positions until you hear a snap and
feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely latched to the buckle by
pulling on the tongue.
5. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
6. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
204
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
7. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch (2.5 cm) of
movement for proper installation.
8. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Installing child safety seats in the front row lap belt seating
positions (Super Cab and Crew Cab)
WARNING: Installing a child safety seat in the front row lap
seating position should be avoided if at all possible.
WARNING: Never place a rear-facing child seat in the front
center seating position of a vehicle with rear seating positions.
WARNING: Front seating positions only: If seating two adults
and a child, Ford recommends properly restraining the child in
the center front seating position, but only if doing so will not interfere
with driving the vehicle. This arrangement provides lap and shoulder
belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment
method for a child restraint. If the child seat interferes with driving the
vehicle and the child restraint is forward-facing, the child may be
restrained in the passenger seat. Move the seat as far rearward as
possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front
passenger airbag. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear
their safety belts. Ensure the child is properly restrained in an
appropriate child seat or with the use of a booster.
1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue so that its
bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the
tongue up the webbing.
205
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position.
3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating
position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue.
5. Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap
belt webbing to tighten the belt.
6. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly tilt the child seat
from side to side and in forward direction to make sure that the seat is
securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be
no more than one inch (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
7. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Note: For Super Cab and Crew Cab there is no top tether anchor for the
front center seating position. See Attaching child safety seats with
tether straps later in this chapter.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position. Your vehicle is not equipped with the lower anchor
points in the seat bight. For this vehicle use the vehicle safety belt and
upper tether to secure a child seat. See Attaching child safety seats
with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety
restraints for children in this chapter for more information.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
206
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The passenger seats of your vehicle may be equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seatback or an
anchor bracket on the rear edge of the seat cushion or an anchor bracket
mounted to the body shell on the back panel.
The SuperCab rear seat has three straps behind the top of the seat back
that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor
loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• F-Series Regular Cab
• F-Series SuperCab
• F-Series Crew Cab
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using the safety belt, you
can attach the top tether strap.
207
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Tether strap attachment
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, other wise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback. If the top of the safety seat
hits the head restraint, raise the head restraint to let the child seat fit
further rearward.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
3. You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before
installing the child seat. Refer to the Rear folding seat system with load
floor section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear
seats.
4. Remove tether cover.
5. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
• Front seats (Regular Cab)
208
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Front seat (SuperCab)
• Rear seats (Crew Cab)
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a collision.
6. Refer to the Installing child safety seats with combination lap and
shoulder belts section of this chapter for further instructions to secure
the child safety seat.
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Tether strap attachment (rear SuperCab only)
There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear window) in the SuperCab. These
loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to
three child safety seat tether straps.
209
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
These straps may be secured below the back of the seat with rubber
bands. To access, reach below the back of the seat and pull tether loop
out of the rubber band securing it.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap through
the loop directly behind the child
seat.
2. Attach the strap hook onto the
loop behind an adjacent seating
position.
3. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the vehicle belts. Follow the
instructions in this chapter.
4. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
A single loop can be used to route and anchor more than one child seat.
For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.
210
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
211
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across
the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
212
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
213
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
214
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your owner’s guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
215
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as
necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD
and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may
accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
216
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
217
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
218
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
219
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
220
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ⬙blowout⬙, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to change the ride characteristics of
the vehicle. If you do not maintain the inflation pressure at the levels
specified by Ford, your vehicle may experience a condition known as
⬙shimmy⬙. Shimmy is a severe vibration and oscillation in the steering
wheel after the vehicle travels over a bump or dip in the road that does
not dampen out by itself. Shimmy may result from significant
under-inflation of the tires, improper tires (load range, size, or type), or
vehicle modifications such as lift-kits. In the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should slowly reduce speed by either lifting off
the accelerator pedal or lightly applying the brakes. The shimmy will
cease as the vehicle speed decreases.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
221
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
222
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire inflation information
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must
utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of
the trajectory area.
WARNING: An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat
or seriously under-inflated without first removing the tire from the
wheel assembly for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or
replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect
persons and property.
223
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Stay out of the trajectory (1) as indicated in the
illustration.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
224
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
225
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
226
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (138 kPa)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (138 kPa) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be
used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may
affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (if equipped).
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged (if equipped).
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
227
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
228
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS
(tire pressure monitoring system), then the settings for the TPMS
sensors need to be updated. Always perform the TPMS reset procedure
after tire rotation. If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure
in this chapter.
229
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• DRW – Six tire rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with dual
rear wheels it is recommended that
the front and rear tires (in pairs) be
rotated only side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set/pair. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be adjusted
for the tires new positions in
accordance with vehicle
requirements.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask your authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
230
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
231
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
232
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
233
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
234
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
235
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
236
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire/wheel cavity. The
pressure sensor is attached to
the valve stem. The pressure
sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is
removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
237
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System:
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)
1. Check your tire pressure to ensure
under-inflated
tires are properly inflated; refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light will turn OFF.
Spare tire in
Your temporary spare tire is in use.
use
Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly inflated and
malfunction
your spare tire is not in use and the
light remains ON, have the system
inspected by your authorized dealer.
Tire rotation
On vehicles with different front and
without sensor rear tire pressures, the TPMS system
training
must be retrained following every
tire rotation. Refer to Tire rotation
in this chapter.
238
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Flashing Warning
Spare tire in
Your temporary spare tire is in use.
Light
use
Repair the damaged road wheel and
re-mount it on the vehicle to restore
system functionality. For a
description of how the system
functions under these conditions,
refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this
section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly inflated and
malfunction
your spare tire is not in use and the
TPMS warning light still flashes, have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
239
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TPMS reset procedure
The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after each tire
rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire
pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires.
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle – refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See
Vehicle Loading in this chapter for more information.
Overview
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some vehicles require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the Low Tire Pressure Warning
indicator at two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for
the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System needs to know
when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can
detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
TPMS reset tips:
• To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, the TPMS
reset procedure should be performed at least 3 feet (1 meter) away
from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS reset
procedure at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two (2) minutes between resetting each tire
sensor or the system will timeout and the entire procedure will have
to be repeated on all four wheels.
• A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the TPMS reset procedure
It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least 2 minutes and
then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires and
have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
240
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
3. Cycle the ignition to the on
position with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then
off 3 times. This must be
accomplished within ten seconds.
If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
will flash and the message center (if
once, the TPMS indicator
equipped) will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at step 2.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the TPMS indicator
does not flash and the message center (if
equipped) does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE, seek service
from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset
sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise
order:
• Left front (Driver’s side front tire)
• Right front (Passenger’s side front tire)
• Right rear (Passenger’s side rear tire)
• Left rear (Driver’s side rear tire)
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code
has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and must be repeated.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
241
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained
(driver’s side rear tire), the TPMS tell tale stops flashing, and the
message center (if equipped) displays:
TRAINING COMPLETE.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Vehicle Loading in this
chapter for more information.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit
failure.
Note: Do not use snow chains on vehicles with 20 inch wheels and tires.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
242
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
243
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
244
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
245
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
246
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
247
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
248
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
249
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle
section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
250
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TRAILER TOWING
Note: The trailer towing charts in this section apply to vehicles equipped
with gasoline engines; for vehicles equipped with diesel engines, refer to
your Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide
Supplement.
Your vehicle may tow a Conventional/Class IV trailer or fifth wheel trailer
provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the
following charts.
To calculate your maximum trailer weight:
For pickup trucks: Take curb weight, hitch hardware and the driver’s
weight, then subtract them from the GCWR listed for your vehicle series,
engine, transmission and drive axle ratio (refer to the chart/table in the
following text). This calculation will give you the maximum trailer
weight possible for your vehicle.
For chassis cabs and pickup trucks with aftermarket equipment:
Weigh your vehicle at a certified scale and subtract this actual curb
weight, hitch hardware, and the driver’s weight from the GCWR listed for
your vehicle series, engine, transmission and drive axle ratio (refer to
the chart/table in the following text). This calculation will give you the
maximum trailer weight possible for your vehicle.
The weight of all additional cargo and passengers must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight calculated above.
Further trailer/hitch restrictions and limitations exist depending on the
type of trailer and hitch used. These additional maximum trailer weight
and tongue load limitations are listed in the chart/table that follows the
listing of GCWRs.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully prior to and after any towing operation. Refer to
Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for the transmission fluid temperature information.
Note: Do not exceed the GCWR listed for your vehicle on the following
chart/table, or the GVWR, GAWR or tire ratings specified on the Tire
Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
trailer weight which exceeds the limit of the vehicle’s GCWR,
GVWR, GAWR or tire ratings could result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
251
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Engine
5.4L
6.8L
5.4L
6.8L
5.4L
6.8L
5.4L
6.8L
5.4L
6.8L
6.8L
Maximum GCWR - lb. (kg.)
Rear axle
Manual
Automatic
ratio
transmission
transmission
F–250 Pick-up
3.73
15000 (6804)
16000 (7257)
4.10
17000 (7711)
18000 (8165)
4.10
20000 (9072)
21000 (9525)
4.30
22000 (9979)
22500 (10206)
F–350 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) Pick-up
3.73
15000 (6804)
16000 (7257)
4.10
17000 (7711)
18000 (8165)
4.10
20000 (9072)
21000 (9525)
4.30
22000 (9979)
23000 (10433)
F–350 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) Pick-up
4.10
—
18500 (8391)
4.10
—
23000 (10433)
F–350 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) Chassis Cab
3.73
—
16000 (7257)
4.10
—
18000 (8165)
4.10
—
21000 (9525)
F–350 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) Chassis Cab
3.73
15000 (6804)
16500 (7484)
4.10
17500 (7938)
18500 (8391)
4.10
20500 (9299)
21500 (9752)
4.30
22500 (10206)
23000 (10433)
F–450 Chassis Cab/F–550
4.88/5.38
26000 (11793)
26000 (11793)
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
252
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Hitches
WARNING: ON PICK-UP TRUCKS, the trailer hitch provided on
this vehicle enhances collision protection for the fuel system. DO
NOT REMOVE!
Do not mount a ball hitch (sometimes referred to as a trailer ball hitch
or trailer ball) to the bumper or use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s
bumper or attach to the axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer
so that 10%–15% for conventional towing or 15%-25% fifth-wheel towing
of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Hitch rating
The standard hitch has two ratings depending on mode of operation:
• Weight carrying - requires a draw bar and hitch ball. The draw bar
supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
• Weight distributing - requires an aftermarket weight distributing
system which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring bars and snap-up
brackets. The vertical tongue load of the trailer is distributed between
the truck and the trailer by this system.
Hitch Type
6.8L DRW Pickup
2.5” ID without
adapter (requires
2.5” drawbar)
6.8L DRW Pickup
2.5” ID with
adapter (requires
2” drawbar)
All SRW Pickups
and 5.4L DRW
Pickups
2” receiver
Weight carrying
Maximum
Gross Trailer
Weight — lb.
(kg)
8000 (3629)
Maximum
Tongue Weight
— lb. (kg)
800 (363)
Weight
distributing
15000 (6804)
1500 (680)
Weight carrying
6000 (2721)
600 (272)
Weight
distributing
12500 (5670)
1250 (567)
Weight carrying
6000 (2721)
600 (272)
Weight
distributing
12500 (5670)
1250 (567)
253
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight
exceeds the limit of the towing system and could result in
vehicle structural damage, loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
Weight distributing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it
can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
the front bumper height is within 1⁄2 inch (13 mm) of the reference
point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher
than in Step 2.
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of
the weight distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling,
and could result in serious personal injury.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
254
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: If you own a trailer with a hydraulic brake system,
do not connect the trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to
your vehicle’s brake system. The vehicle’s brake system is only
designed to carry the appropriate amount of brake fluid for the vehicle
alone. Connecting a hydraulic trailer braking system could adversely
affect your vehicle’s braking performance.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Integrated trailer brake controller (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic Trailer
Brake Controller (TBC). When used properly, the TBC helps ensure
smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric
brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle’s brake
pressure.
WARNING: The Ford TBC has only been verified to be
compatible with trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes
(one to four axles) and not hydraulic surge or electric-over-hydraulic
types. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer
brakes are adjusted appropriately, functioning normally and all electric
connections are properly made.
The TBC user interface consists of
the following:
1. +/- (GAIN adjustment
buttons): Pressing these buttons
will adjust the TBC’s power output
to the trailer brakes (in
0.5 increments). The GAIN setting
can be increased to a maximum of
10.0 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and
holding a button will raise or lower the setting continuously. The gain
setting will display in the message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
255
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The trailer brake controller (TBC) is designed to display three items of
information in the instrument cluster message center. These are: gain
setting, output bar graph, and trailer connectivity status. They will
appear as follows in the message center.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: The instrument cluster message
center will display the current gain setting during a given ignition
cycle and when adjusting the gain. This message is also displayed
during manual activation without a trailer connected or when gain
adjustments are made with no trailer connected.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT = //////: When the vehicle’s brake pedal
is pushed, or when the manual control is activated, bar indicators will
illuminate in the instrument cluster message center to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal
or manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output
with six bars indicating maximum output.
• TRAILER CONNECTED: This message is displayed when a correct
trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) has
been sensed during a given ignition cycle.
• TRAILER DISCONNECTED: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, when a trailer connection was
determined and then a disconnection, either intentionally or
unintentionally, has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. It is also
displayed if a truck or trailer wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to
appear disconnected. This message is also displayed during manual
activation without a trailer connected.
2. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s
brakes (see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for
instructions on proper use of this feature). If the manual control is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
• Stop Lamps: Activating the TBC manual control lever will illuminate
both the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except
the Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (presuming proper trailer electrical
connection). Pressing the vehicle brake pedal will also illuminate both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for adjusting GAIN:
The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing
condition and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
256
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking
assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking.
Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
Note: This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally, and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in, the TRAILER
CONNECTED message will display in the instrument cluster message
center.
4. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or decrease the
GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A GAIN setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock-up (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the
GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may
not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Explanation of instrument cluster warning messages:
The TBC interacts with the instrument cluster message center to display
the following messages:
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
In the event this message is seen, please contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. The TBC may still function,
but performance may be degraded.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: This message is displayed when a
Short circuit on the electric brake output wire has occurred. If the
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER message is displayed and accompanied
by a single chime, with no trailer connected, the problem is with the
vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7–pin connector in the bumper. If the
message is only displayed with a trailer connected, the problem is related
257
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
to the trailer wiring; consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can
be a short to ground (i.e., chaffed wire) or a short to voltage (i.e., pulled
pin on trailer emergency break-away battery) or trailer brakes drawing
too much current.
Note: Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred; however, if the fault
is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford
warranty.
Points to Remember:
• Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first
time.
• Readjust GAIN setting on the TBC (according to procedure above)
whenever road, weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from those that existed when the gain was initially set.
• The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual
activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the
GAIN. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway, could cause
instability of trailer and/or tow vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The TBC does not
provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock-up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced stability of trailer
and tow vehicle.
• The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle, including
ABS, in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lockup.
Therefore, if these systems are not functioning properly the TBC may
not function at full performance.
• When the vehicle is turned off, the TBC Output is disabled and the
display is shut down. Reactivation of the ignition from OFF to ON will
awaken the TBC module.
• The TBC is only a factory or dealer installed item. Ford is not
responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or
customer installation.
• Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
258
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 km) of trailer towing and don’t make full-throttle starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive transmission shifting, activate the Tow/Haul
feature. This will also assist in transmission cooling. For additional
information, refer to Automatic transmission operation in the
Driving chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. If the spare tire is different in size (diameter and/or width), tread
type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer
other than the road tires on your vehicle, your spare tire is considered
“temporary”. Consult information on the spare Tire Label or Safety
Compliance Certification Label for limitations when using.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing safety tips
General
• Ensure that the trailer, safety chains and 7–pin electrical connectors
are securely fastened.
• Make sure the truck receiver, draw bar, and coupler are properly
connected and adjusted.
• Check rear view and side mirrors for proper visibility especially when
towing trailer wider than the truck.
• When towing, operate the vehicle at lower speeds than you would
when not towing a trailer. The likelihood of trailer sway is greater at
higher speeds.
259
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant if not already so
equipped. Refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and
Capacities in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for the
proper axle lubricant. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lubricant used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of
a new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles of towing be done at no
faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) with no full-throttle starts.
• When turning make wide turns to allow trailer tires to properly clear
any obstacles.
• Be prepared for trailer sway due to buffeting when larger vehicles
pass in either direction.
Loading
• Keep the center-of-gravity low for best handling.
• Trailer loads should be evenly distributed front to back and left to
right.
• The load distribution within the trailer should be such that 10%–15%
of the trailer weight is on the hitch. (15%–25% for fifth-wheel or
gooseneck towing.)
• Never exceed truck, trailer, receiver, ball, tongue, tire or coupler
loading recommendations.
Braking
• The trailer brakes must be inspected and serviced at intervals
specified by the manufacturer. This includes the shoes, drum and
trailer brake magnets.
• Electric brakes also require periodic adjustment to keep the shoes
properly spaced. If the brakes get hot when driving or if they will not
hold, chances are that they need adjustment.
• Anticipate the need to stop; allow much more distance and time to
stop than normal.
• Do not apply the trailer brakes for extended periods of time as they
can overheat and lose effectiveness.
260
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Backing up
• Practice backing up, particularly if you are a novice. Turn the steering
wheel to the right to move the trailer’s rear end to the right.
• Sharp steering movements may cause the trailer to jackknife or go out
of control.
Tires
• All trailer tires should be of the same size, and construction.
• Select tires that meet the trailer loading requirements.
• Always check tow vehicle and trailer tire pressure before towing.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
261
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
controls chapter for more information.
Transmission
Manual
Drivetrain
configuration
4x4 with manual-shift
transfer case
Automatic
Manual
4X2 or 4x4 with
electronic-shift
transfer case
Automatic
1
Requirements for
neutral towing
Transmission in (N)
Neutral; Transfer case
in (N) (Neutral);
Hublocks set to FREE1
Do not tow your
vehicle with any
wheels on the ground,
as vehicle or
transmission damage
may occur. It is
recommended to tow
your vehicle with all
four (4) wheels off the
ground such as when
using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, no
recreational towing is
permitted.
Always make sure that both hub locks are set to the same position.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
262
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. Off— shuts off the engine and all
accessories/locks the steering wheel
and allows key removal.
2. Accessory— allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running. This position also unlocks
the steering wheel.
3. On— all electrical circuits
operational. Warning lights
illuminated. Key position when driving.
4. Start— cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
263
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked. If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing
snow conditions, the engine air induction may become partially clogged
with snow and/or ice. If this occurs, the engine may experience a
significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear
all the snow and/or ice away from the air induction inlet. The following
starting instructions are for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine; if
your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine, refer to Starting the
engine in your 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
2. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
264
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
If starting a vehicle with a manual
transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
2. Push the clutch pedal to the floor.
• Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start). If there
is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely. This condition may
occur when:
• the front wheels are turned
• a front wheel is against the curb
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine begins cranking. Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking
system that assists in starting the engine. After releasing the key from
the 4 (start) position, the engine may continue cranking for up to
10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
265
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off
position.
3. After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, apply the
brake, shift into gear and drive.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to the off
position, wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again. If the engine still fails to
start, press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again, keeping the
accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above
cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off
in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or
air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical harm.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
266
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s laboratory (UL ) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ⬙Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.⬙ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to Use the Engine Block Heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
267
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
of power per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately 3 hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than
3 hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use
additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Warning lights and
!
P
chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking. The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake application and compensates for this
tendency. Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation
may be observed during ABS braking; any pulsation or mechanical noise
you may feel or hear is normal. In addition, the ABS performs a
self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away. A brief
mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
268
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ABS
Driving
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.
!
P
BRAKE
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated until the
parking brake is released.
!
P
BRAKE
269
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Pull the release lever to release the
parking brake. To prevent the pedal
from releasing too quickly, place
your left foot on the service brake
pedal, then slowly pull the release
lever until the pedal slowly releases.
Make sure that the pedal is fully
released. You may want to pull the
release lever again to make sure the
parking brake is fully released.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the engine
may be required to run while power accessories operate and the parking
brake is set. It is recommended that wheel chocks be used during this
operation.
If you’re parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold
the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little
vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle’s weight.
This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking
brake. Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the
weight of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the
vehicle may be overloaded.
TRACTION CONTROL™ (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control™ system. This
system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle,
especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow- or ice-covered roads
and gravel roads. The system will allow your vehicle to make better use
of available traction in these conditions.
During Traction Control™ operation,
the traction control light will
illuminate and the engine will not
“rev-up” when you push further on
the accelerator. This is normal
system behavior and should be no
reason for concern. Also, if traction control is on when the vehicle is put
270
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
into four-wheel drive mode (if equipped), the traction control system will
be automatically disabled. Traction control operation will resume when
the vehicle is placed back into two-wheel drive mode.
WARNING: Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe
personal injury or property damage. The occurrence of a Traction
Control™ event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
The Traction Control™ switch,
located on the instrument panel to
the left of the climate control
system, has an indicator light that
illuminates when the system is off.
The Traction Control™ system will
automatically turn on every time the
ignition is turned off and on. The
Traction Control™ system should normally be left on.
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the Traction Control™ system off. This may allow
excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful
“rocking” maneuver.
If a system fault is detected, the traction control active light will
illuminate, the Traction Control™ button will not turn the system on or
off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than three to five seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer.
271
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused by low power steering fluid.
Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service
by your dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
If any steering components are serviced or replaced, install new
fasteners (many are coated with thread adhesive or have prevailing
torque features which may not be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut.
Torque fasteners to specifications in Workshop Manual.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
LIMITED-SLIP AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Limited-slip axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
272
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower
speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over-loading
or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability
and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the 3 (on) position and the brake pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
273
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
If the fuse is not blown and the brakelamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the
ignition key to 1 (off), then remove
the key. Locate the access cover
plate for the brake-shift interlock
override. It is located on top of the
steering column shroud.
2. Apply the brake. Use a tool (or a
small screwdriver) to pry out the
access cover. Insert the tool into the
access hole and slide the white
override button towards the left.
Move the gear shift lever into N
(Neutral) while holding the white
override disc towards the left.
3. Start the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
274
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
275
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul ON
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using Tow/Haul.
To activate Tow/Haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Tow/Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the Tow/Haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
WARNING: Do not use the Tow/Haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
276
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Overdrive) or D (Drive).
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
277
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
R 1 3 D
L 2 4
Using the clutch
Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents
cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully pressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the
neutral position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while
slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the floor.
Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with
the full extension of the clutch pedal.
Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floor may cause
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission
components or damage the transmission.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a
hill. These actions will severely reduce the life of the clutch and
could nullify a clutch warranty claim.
Recommended shift speeds
Do not overspeed the engine when going downhill or steep grades. If
equipped, use the tachometer and do not allow engine speed to exceed
the redline area. Operating the engine beyond the recommended speeds
can cause severe engine damage.
278
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Shift according to the following shift speed charts:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
6-speed transmission
Shift from:
Transfer case position1 (if equipped)
2H or 4H
4L
LO-1
5 mph (8 km/h)
2 mph (3 km/h)
1-2
14 mph (23 km/h)
6 mph (10 km/h)
2-3
22 mph (35 km/h)
9 mph (14 km/h)
3-4
30 mph (48 km/h)
12 mph (19 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
15 mph (24 km/h)
4
- D (Overdrive)
1
2
Maximum downshift speeds1
6-speed transmission
Shift from:
Transfer case position (if equipped)2
2H or 4H
4L
45 mph (72 km/h)
16 mph (26 km/h)
D (Overdrive) 4
4-3
35 mph (56 km/h)
12 mph (19 km/h)
3-2
20 mph (32 km/h)
8 mph (13 km/h)
2-1
5 mph (8 km/h)
2 mph (3 km/h)
1-LO
Only shift to LO when at a stop.
Use 2H or 4H for 4WD equipped vehicles.
Downshift at lower speeds when driving on slippery surfaces.
Reverse
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into
R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).
Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving
it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally
being shifted into R (Reverse) from D (Overdrive).
279
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).
3. Turn the ignition off.
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the
parking brake fully.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The reverse sensing system (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as
contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in reverse and when using the RSS.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
280
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to
6 feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning the radio
volume may be reduced to a
predetermined level. After the
warning goes away, the radio will return to the previous volume.
The RSS may have reduced performance or an increased chance of false
detection if the tailgate is not locked and in the upright position. If the
tailgate is down, the RSS tone may be heard intermittently or
continuously. The tone may also be heard if items in the truck bed
protrude rearward outside the bed.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows
the driver to disable the system, refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
281
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera system,
located on the tailgate, provides a
video image, which appears in the
rearview mirror or on the navigation
screen (if equipped), of the area
behind the vehicle. It adds
assistance to the driver while
reversing or reverse parking the
vehicle.
To use the camera system, place the transmission in R (Reverse); an
image will display on the left portion of the rearview mirror or on the
navigation screen (if equipped). The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to the vehicle orientation and/or road condition.
• (1) Rear bumper
• (2) Red zone
• (3) Yellow zone
• (4) Green zone
• (5) Centerline of vehicle
Always use caution while backing.
Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the
green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones.
Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both
sides and rear of the vehicle.
282
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
When shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any other gear, the image will
remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off to assist in parking or
trailer hookup.
If equipped with the navigation system, after shifting out of R (Reverse)
and into any gear other than P (Park), the image will remain until the
vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h), only if the rear camera delay
feature is on, or until any navigation radio button is pressed.
Note: The default setting for the rear camera delay is off. Press the
“Settings” button found on the navigation screen (if equipped) to set the
rear camera delay feature to on or off.
When towing, the camera system will only see what is being towed
behind the vehicle; this might not provide adequate coverage as it
usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be
seen.
The camera lens for the camera is located on the tailgate, near the
tailgate handle. Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and
undistorted. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.
WARNING: The camera system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with
the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the camera system with the tailgate
open.
If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your
authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper
coverage and operation.
283
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Night time and dark area use
At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.
Servicing
• If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
• If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the
lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear
after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in
this chapter.
When four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four
wheels through a transfer case. 4WD can be selected when additional
driving power is desired.
4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could
result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear
and decreased fuel economy.
Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4x4 system (if equipped)
The 4WD system is engaged or
disengaged by rotating the control
for both front wheel hub locks from
the FREE or LOCK position, then
manually engaging or disengaging
the transfer case with the
floor-mounted shifter. For increased
fuel economy in 2WD, rotate both
hub locks to the FREE position.
• For proper operation, make
sure that each hub is fully engaged and that both hub locks are
set to the same position (both set to LOCK or both set to
FREE). To engage LOCK, turn the hub locks completely
clockwise; to disengage the hubs (FREE), turn the hub locks
completely counterclockwise.
284
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• Some vehicles may be equipped with wheel ornaments that cover the
4x4 manual hub lock. These ornaments must be removed to access
the manual hub locks.
Electronic Shift On the Fly (ESOF) 4x4 system (if equipped)
If equipped with the electronic shift 4WD System, and the
instrument panel control is moved to 4X4 LOW while the vehicle
is moving above 5 mph (8 km/h), the system will not engage and
no damage will occur to the 4WD system. Before 4X4 LOW can be
engaged, the vehicle speed must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) with
the transmission in N (Neutral). If your vehicle is equipped with
a manual transmission, the clutch pedal also must be depressed.
The 4x4 Low indicator will flash continuously until these actions
are performed by the user. This vehicle is equipped with a
non-synchronous low range gearset which will not allow the
transfer case to shift into 4X4 LOW if vehicle speed is above
5 mph (8 km/h). It is recommended that a shift to 4X4 LOW is
performed while the vehicle is rolling at a speed below 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The 4WD system:
• provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.
• is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that
allows you select 2WD, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation.
• uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected.
• auto-manual hub locks can be
manually overridden by rotating
the hub lock control from AUTO
to LOCK if desired.
• automatic operation of the
hub locks is recommended, and
will increase fuel economy
• For proper operation, make
sure that each hub is fully
engaged and that both hub
locks are set to the same position (both set to LOCK or both
set to AUTO). To engage LOCK, turn the hub locks completely
clockwise; to engage AUTO, turn the hub locks completely
counterclockwise.
285
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
4WD system indicator lights
The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following
conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• 4x4 HIGH - momentarily
4x4
illuminates after the engine is
HIGH
started. Illuminates when 4H (4x4
High) is engaged. Flashes when
shifting into or out of 4H (4x4 high) (ESOF systems only).
• 4x4 LOW – momentarily
4x4
illuminates when the ignition is
LOW
turned to the ON position.
Illuminates when 4L (4x4 Low) is
engaged. Flashes when shifting into or out of 4L (4x4 Low) or if the
range shift conditions are not met (ESOF systems only).
Using a Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4x4 system (if equipped)
Note: High shift efforts may be encountered when attempting to
shift into and out of 4x4 modes. It is recommended to allow the
vehicle to roll at a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h) when shifting.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4x4 system shifts or engages.
This is normal. In order to reduce engagement noise, it is recommended
that all shifts be performed at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
2H (2WD) – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only.
4H (4x4 High) – For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to
front and rear wheels. This mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
N (Neutral) – Only used when towing the vehicle.
4L (4x4 Low) – For low-speed off-road applications that require extra
power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water.
Sends power to front and rear wheels. This mode is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
286
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Shifting from 2H (2WD) to 4H (4x4 High)
Engage the locking hubs by rotating
the hub lock control from FREE to
LOCK, then move the transfer case
lever from 2H (2WD) to 4H (4x4
High) at a stop or a vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• For proper operation, make
sure that both indicator
arrows on the hub are aligned,
and that both hubs are set to
LOCK.
• Do not shift into 4H (4x4
High) with the rear wheels
slipping.
2H
4H
N
4L
Shifting from 4H (4x4 High) to 2H (2WD)
Move the transfer case lever to 2H
2H
(2WD) at a stop or a vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h).
4H
With the vehicle at complete stop,
N
disengage the locking hubs
(optional) by rotating the hub lock
4L
control from LOCK to FREE.
• For proper operation, make
sure that both indicator arrows on the hub are aligned, and
that both hubs are set to FREE
Shifting from 4H (4x4 High) to 4L (4x4 Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h).
2. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral). If the vehicle is equipped with
a manual transmission, also depress the clutch pedal.
287
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
3. Move the transfer case shift lever
2H
through N (Neutral) directly to 4L
(4x4 Low).
4H
4. If the shift lever does not, or only
N
partially moves to the 4L (4x4 Low)
position, perform a shift with the
4L
transmission in N (Neutral) (or
clutch pedal depressed) and the
vehicle rolling at a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h). This will ensure the
transfer case is fully engaged into 4L (4x4 Low).
Shifting from 4L (4x4 Low) to 4H (4x4 High) or 2H (2WD)
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h).
2. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral). If the vehicle is equipped with
a manual transmission, also depress the clutch pedal.
3. Move the transfer case shift lever
2H
through N (Neutral) directly to 4H
(4x4 High) or 2H (2WD).
4H
4. If the transfer case will not
N
engage into 4H (4x4 High) or 2H
(2WD), perform a shift with the
4L
transmission in N (Neutral) (or
clutch pedal depressed) and the
vehicle rolling at a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h).
5. If shifting to 2H (2WD) with the vehicle at a complete stop, disengage
the locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub lock control from LOCK
to FREE.
Using the N (Neutral) position
The transfer case neutral
position overrides the
transmission and puts the
vehicle in neutral regardless of
transmission gearshift lever
position. The vehicle can move
forward or backwards.
This position should only be used
when towing the vehicle.
288
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2H
4H
N
4L
Driving
WARNING: Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking
brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
Using the Electronic Shift On the Fly (ESOF) 4x4 system
(if equipped)
Positions of the electronic shift system
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.
This is normal.
2WD – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear wheels only.
4x4 HIGH – For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to front
and rear wheels. This mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
4x4 LOW – For low-speed off-road applications that require extra power
such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water. Sends
power to front and rear wheels. This mode is not intended for use on
dry pavement.
Shifting from 2WD to 4x4 HIGH
Rotate the 4x4 control to the 4x4
HIGH position at speeds up to
55 mph (88 km/h).
• The electronic shift 4x4
system is designed to engage
4x4 HIGH when the vehicle is
moving. If shifted to 4x4
HIGH while at complete stop,
4x4 may not engage and the
4x4 indicator may flash
continuously until the vehicle
is allowed to move at a speed above 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping.
289
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH to 2WD
Rotate the 4x4 control to 2WD at
any forward speed. Disengagement
of the transfer case and front hubs
may be delayed due to torque bind
which is caused by driving on dry
hard surfaces or performing tight
turns while using the 4x4 system.
• You do not need to operate the
vehicle in R (Reverse) to
disengage your front hubs, but it
will eliminate any torque bind and
allow the system to immediately disengage.
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH to 4x4 LOW
If the range shift requirements are not met, the 4x4 Low
indicator will flash continuously.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral). If the vehicle is equipped with a
manual transmission, also depress the clutch pedal.
3. Move the 4x4 control to the 4x4
LOW position.
4. Hold the shift conditions until the
4x4 LOW indicator light illuminates.
5. If the 4x4 LOW indicator light
flashes continuously for more than
10 seconds, allow the vehicle to
move at a speed below 5 mph
(8 km/h), then repeat steps 2
through 5 while the vehicle is rolling
before reporting any shift concerns to your authorized dealer.
Shifting from 4x4 LOW to 4x4 HIGH or 2WD
If the range shift requirements are not met, the 4x4 Low or 4x4
High indicator will flash continuously, depending on which mode
the shift began.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral).
290
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
3. Move the 4x4 control to the 4x4
HIGH or 2WD position.
4. Hold the shift conditions until the
4x4 LOW indicator light shuts off.
5. If the 4x4 LOW or 4x4 High
indicator light flashes continuously
for more than 10 seconds, allow the
vehicle to move at a speed below
5 mph (8 km/h), then repeat steps 2
through 5 while the vehicle is rolling
before reporting any shift concerns to your authorized dealer.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a long front air dam that may become
damaged (due to reduced ground clearance) when taking your vehicle
off-road. This air dam can either be removed or a shorter air dam can be
purchased from your authorized dealer. In either case, if the air dam is
to be removed (or replaced) before going off-road, refer to the
Workshop Manual for the procedure or have your authorized dealer
perform the work for you.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
291
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
292
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to
the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Refer to Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument
Cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
293
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
4WD Systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance
can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. You
should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
294
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: If air is released from your tires, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) indicator light may illuminate (if equipped).
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
295
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the
wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip,
spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
manually shift to a lower gear. Your
vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
296
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use
a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing
force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you
may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels,
release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. If your vehicle
is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the
brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of
this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock
brake system.
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep
speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive
steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can
lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
297
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off, or PTO, is often added to the
engine or transmission to operate utility equipment. Examples include a
wheel-lift for tow trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire service,
and pumping fluids. PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from
the powertrain, often while the vehicle is stationary. In this condition,
there is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the
vehicle that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving. The aftermarket
PTO system installer, having the most knowledge of the final application,
is responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection
or powertrain cooling is required, and alerting the user to the safe and
proper operation.
Ford Super Duty Vehicles are qualified for use as a stationary power
source, within limits detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout
Book, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas, and through the Ford
Truck Body Builders Advisory Service.
Gas engine vehicles are qualified for up to 10 minutes of continuous
operation as a stationary power source, due to the potential for the
normal venting of fuel vapors. For stationary PTO operation of extended
duration (beyond 10 minutes), diesel engine is recommended. Further
consult your aftermarket PTO installer, since the duration of operation
limit for the aftermarket PTO may be less than the vehicle is capable of.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
298
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
SNOWPLOWING
Ford recommends that the Super Duty F-Series used for snow removal
include the Snow Plow Package Option.
Installing the snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow can
be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, Snowplow
section, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical installation
affects the following:
• Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection
and airbag deployment, braking, and lighting. Look for an “Alterer’s
Label” on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the
installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
• The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity (TARC) is shown on the lower
right side of the vehicle’s Safety Compliance Certification Label. This
applies to Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 lb. (4,536 kg) GVWR or
less. This is the weight of permanently-attached auxiliary equipment,
such as snowplow frame-mounting hardware, that can be added to the
vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to FMVSS. Exceeding
this weight may require the auxiliary equipment installer additional
safety certification responsibility. The Front Accessory Reserve
Capacity (FARC) is added for customer convenience.
• Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide front-to-rear weight balance for
proper braking and steering.
• Front wheel toe may require re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop
Manual.
• Headlight aim may require re-adjustment.
299
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on
the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. The maximum cold inflation
pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the tire
sidewall. Tire air pressure may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
• Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your authorized dealer for
additional information.
• The snow plow prep package includes a unique powertrain control
strategy which is required for diesel engine cooling during highway
driving with the snowplow raised.
Operating the vehicle with the snowplow attached
Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has been driven at
least 500 miles (800 km).
The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator, and may
cause the engine to run at a higher temperature: Attention to engine
temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are
above freezing. Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and
monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Follow the severe duty schedule in your scheduled maintenance
information for engine oil and transmission fluid change intervals.
Snowplowing with your airbag-equipped vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger airbag
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The SRS is designed to activate in
certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the airbag. Such driving also
increases the risk of accidents.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Never remove or defeat the “tripping mechanisms” designed into the
snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause
damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as
possible airbag deployment.
300
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
WARNING: Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment
may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the
risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.
Transmission operation while plowing
Operate the vehicle with the automatic transmission gearshift lever in
the D (Overdrive) position and Tow/Haul off.
• Shift transfer case to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) when plowing in small
areas at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift transfer case to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) when plowing larger
areas or light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.
• If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or
the engine can overheat.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute. The
transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may
overheat.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
301
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
302
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may
purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information,
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
303
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
This switch is located on the
passenger’s side of the instrument
panel. Open the front passenger
door and remove the small access
panel
The switch has a red button on top
of it.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition on.
5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to off.
6. Make another check for leaks.
304
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black
305
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located in the
passenger’s footwell. Remove the
panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove the fuse panel cover, pull
the panel toward you. When the
clips of the panel disengage, let the
panel fall easily.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller
tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
Always replace the cover to the passenger compartment fuse
panel before reconnecting the battery.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
306
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
15A
15A
30A
10A
6
7
8
9
20A
10A
10A
15A
10
15A
Protected Circuits
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Family entertainment system (FES)
Not used (spare)
Keypad illumination, Brake-shift
interlock (BSI), SPBJB
Turn signals
Left headlamp (Low beam)
Right headlamp (Low beam)
Interior lighting, Lighted running
boards
Cargo lamp, Puddle lamp, Switch
backlight
307
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
11
12
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
7.5A
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
5A
10A
10A
15A
20A
20A
25A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
10A
26
27
10A
20A
28
29
30
31
32
5A
5A
5A
10A
10A
308
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Protected Circuits
Not used (spare)
Power mirror switch, Driver power
seat (Memory)
Not used (spare)
Upfitter relay #3 feed
Climate control head
Upfitter relay #4 Feed
All lock motor feeds
Heated seat relay feed
Not used (spare)
Adjustable pedals, Datalink
Fog lamp relay feed, Cornering lamps
Park lamp relay feed
High beam headlight relay feed
Horn relay feed
Power telescoping mirror switch,
Demand lamps - underhood and
illuminated visor (battery saver)
Cluster
Ignition switch feed, Passenger
compartment fuses 28, 42, 43, 44, and
45, Engine compartment starter relay
coil #57 (Diesel engine), Accessory
shutoff control module (if equipped)
(Diesel engine), Engine compartment
starter relay diode (gasoline engines)
Radio
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Restraints control module (RCM),
Passenger airbag deactivation
indicator
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
33
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
34
35
5A
10A
36
5A
37
38
39
40
10A
20A
20A
20A
41
15A
42
10A
43
44
45
10A
10A
5A
46
47
7.5A
30A Circuit
Breaker
Relay
48
Protected Circuits
Trailer tow brake controller, Trailer
tow battery charge relay coil
Not used (spare)
Reverse sensing system (RSS), 4x4
module, 4x4 solenoid, Traction
control switch, Tow/Haul switch
(Diesel engine)
Passive anti-theft system (PATS)
transceiver, Cluster control
Climate control, PTC control
Subwoofer
Radio, Navigation radio and amplifier
4x4 module, Satellite radio module,
SYNC威, GPS
Radio, Auto dimming rear view
mirror, Lock switch illumination
Heated seat relay coil, Upfitter switch
relay coils, Heated mirror relay coil
Fuel tank selector switch, 4x4 module
Run customer access feed (PTO)
Front wiper logic, Blower motor relay
coil
Not used (spare)
Power windows, Moon roof, Power
rear sliding window
Delayed accessory
309
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
Relay
2
Relay
3
4
5
Relay
—
30A*
310
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Protected Circuits
Blower motor/Variable blower control
(Dual zone climate control)
Electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF)
Lo-Hi
Heater mirror
Not used
Trailer brake controller (TBC)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
6
Fuse Amp
Rating
40A*
7
8
9
10
30A*
30A*
40A*
20A*
11
12
13
20A*
15A**
5A**
14
15
16
17
18
—
—
Relay
Relay
Relay
19
Relay
20
21
22
Relay
Relay
Relay
23
24
25
26
27
15A**
40A*
—
30A*
50A*
Protected Circuits
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
(Pump)
Upfitter auxiliary switch #1
Upfitter auxiliary switch #2
ABS module (Coil)
Instrument panel power point/cigar
lighter
Instrument panel power point
Brake on/off (BOO) relay feed
Brake switch, Brake switch relay coil,
SJB module, 4x4 module
Not used
Not used
A/C clutch
Wipers
Fuel pump driver module (FPDM),
Fuel injectors (Gasoline engines),
Diesel fuel control module (DFCM)
(Diesel engine)
Back-up lamps, Reverse sensing
system (RSS), Engine compartment
fuse 63
Trailer stop/turn (Left)
Trailer stop/turn (Right)
Stop lamps, Center high-mounted
stop lamp (CHMSL), TBC, Customer
access
Heater mirror, Heated spotted mirror
Blower motor relay
Not used
ESOF relay lo-hi
Glow plug control module (GPCM) #1
(Diesel engine only)
311
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Fuse Amp
Rating
20A*
30A*
10A**
15A**
20A**
20A**
25A**
5A**
10A**
37
10A**
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
—
50A*
30A*
20A*
30A*
20A*
30A*
30A*
46
47
48
49
50
40A*
50A*
30A*
30A*
30A*
51
52
—
—
312
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Protected Circuits
Heated mirror relay
Passenger power seat
A/C clutch relay
Power fold mirror relay
Fuel pump relay
Back-up lamp relay
Trailer stop/turn relay
ESOF relay coils
Gasoline engines: Powertrain
control module (PCM) keep alive
power, Canister vent
Diesel engine: Engine control
module (ECM) keep alive power
Transmission control module (TCM)
(Diesel engine only)
Not used
ECM power (Diesel engine)
Starter relay
Power point (Center console - front)
Trailer park lamp relay
Power point (Center console - rear)
Trailer battery charge relay
Driver power seat or memory module,
Air ride seats
Run/Start relay
GPCM #2 (Diesel engine only)
ESOF relay hi-lo
Wiper motor
PCM relay coil, PCM relay (Gasoline
engines only)
Not used
Not used
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
53
Fuse Amp
Rating
Relay
54
55
56
57
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
58
59
Relay
Relay
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Diode
Diode
Diode
15A**
5A**
—
—
—
—
—
10A**
71
5A**
72
15A**
73
2A**
Protected Circuits
PCM power bus (Fuses 68, 70, 72,
74, 76) (Diesel engine only)
Starter solenoid
Trailer tow park lamps
Trailer tow battery charge
Power Distribution Box (PDB) bus
(fuses 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 77)
SJB Run /Start bus (Fuses 29–37, 46)
ESOF hi-lo
PCM power bus (Fuses 68, 70, 72,
74, 76) (Gasoline engines only)
One-touch start (OTIS)
A/C clutch
Fuel pump
Trailer tow back-up lamps
Mirror marker lamps
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Gasoline engines: A/C clutch relay
coil, Refrigerant containment switch,
Heated PCV
Diesel engine: A/C clutch relay coil,
Clutch switch, Fuel pump cooler, A/C
cycle pressure switch
Fuel pump relay diode, PCM/ECM
Run/Start power
Gasoline engines: Ignition coils
Diesel engine: Engine TCM
Reverse Camera System (RCS)
313
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
74
Fuse Amp
Rating
20A**
75
76
5A**
20A**
77
10A**
* Cartridge fuses ** Mini fuses
Protected Circuits
Gasoline engines: Vehicle power
(VPWR): Heated exhaust gas oxygen
sensor, CMS, Mass air flow sensor,
Electronic vapor management valve,
CMCV, Variable cam timing, IMTV
Diesel engine: VPWR: Engine loads
Back-up relay coil power
Gasoline engines: VPWR: PCM
Diesel engine: VPWR: ECM
ABS module logic
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire that is
different in one or more of the following: type, brand, size, speed rating
and tread design. If this is the case, this dissimilar spare tire is still rated
for your vehicle loads (GAWR and GVWR).Temporary spare tires are not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors if the
system is present.
WARNING: The use of tire sealant may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (if equipped) and should not be
used.
WARNING: If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
314
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with
a temporary emergency spare tire. If 4WD operation is necessary, do not
operate above speeds of 10 mph (16 km/h) or for distances above
50 miles (80 km).
315
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Spare tire information
Note: If your vehicle is equipped the tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS), the system indicator light will illuminate when the spare is in
use. To restore the full functionality of the TPMS system, all road wheels
equipped with the tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on
the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, have a flat tire serviced by an
authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor; refer
to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheel and
Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with the road tire as soon as
possible.
316
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Stopping and securing the vehicle
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the tire being
changed.
Refer to the instruction sheet (located in the glove box) for detailed tire
change instructions.
Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
• Automatic transmission: Place
gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Manual transmission: Place
gearshift lever in R (Reverse).
• Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly
(ESOF) 4x4: Place transfer case
in 4x4 HIGH or 4x4 LOW before
turning off the engine.
• Manual shift transfer case 4x4: Place transfer case in 4H or 4L.
Location of the spare tire and tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire, jack and associated tools,
refer to the following table for their locations:
Tool
Spare tire (pick-up trucks only)
Jack
Location
Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Regular cab and Crew Cab:
Fastened to floor pan behind
rearmost seat on passenger side
SuperCab: Under rear bench seat
on passenger side
317
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Tool
Jack handle, lug wrench, lug
wrench extension (only available
on Dual Rear Wheel [DRW]
vehicles) and wheel chock (only
available on Single Rear Wheel
[SRW] vehicles equipped with a
diesel engine)
Key and spare tire lock
Jack instruction sheet
Location
Regular cab: Fastened to floor
behind driver seat
SuperCab: Fastened to floor under
rear seat
Crew Cab: Fastened to floor
behind rear seat at driver side
In the glove box
Under the jack tool kit
Removing the spare tire (with spare tire carrier only)
1. The following tools are required to remove the spare tire:
• one handle extension and two
typical extensions. To assemble,
align button with hole and slide
parts together. To disconnect,
depress button and pull apart.
• one wheel nut wrench. Slide over
square end of jack handle.
• Vehicles equipped with dual
rear wheels, insert the lug
wrench extension into the lug
wrench to reach the lug nuts.
318
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
2. Attach the spare tire lock key (A)
to the jack handle (B).
3. Fully insert the jack handle (with
one extension) through the bumper
hole and into the guide tube. The
key and lock will engage with a
slight push and counterclockwise
turn. Some resistance will be felt
when turning the jack handle
assembly.
4. Turn the handle counterclockwise
and lower the spare tire until you
can slide the tire rearward and the
cable is slack.
5. Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Tire change procedure
WARNING: When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission). To help prevent
the vehicle from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the
parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked.
WARNING: To prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
319
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Turn engine off and block the
wheel that is diagonally opposite of
the flat tire using the wheel chock,
if equipped. If the vehicle is a
4x4, lock the manual hub on the
wheel.
2. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug wrench and spare tire from the
stowage locations.
3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
The following steps apply to F–250/F–350 Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) vehicles only:
5. Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the jack and use the
handle to slide the jack under the
vehicle.
6. Position the jack according to the
following guides:
• Front (4x2)
320
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• Front driver side (4x4)
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto
the flat area on the outboard side of
the differential.
• Front passenger side (4x4)
Note: View shown from the rear of
the vehicle to clearly identify the
jack point. Place the jack directly
under the axle.
• Rear
321
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
WARNING: To lessen the
risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while changing a
tire. Do not start the engine when
your vehicle is on the jack. The
jack is only meant for changing
the tire.
7. Turn the jack handle clockwise
until the wheel is completely off the
ground and high enough to install
the spare tire.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward for all front wheels and single rear wheel vehicles.
If replacing an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel vehicles, the valve
stem must be facing outward. If replacing the outboard wheel, the valve
stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
Go to step 19.
The following steps apply to F–350 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) and
F–450/F–550 vehicles only:
11. Slide the notched end of the
jack handle over the release valve
and use the handle to slide the jack
under the vehicle. Make sure the
valve is closed by turning it
clockwise.
322
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
12. Position the jack according to the following guides:
• Front (4x2): F–350 DRW
Note: Place jack directly under
I-beam.
• Front driver side (4x4): F–350
DRW
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto
the flat area on the outboard side of
the differential housing.
• Front passenger side (4x4): F-350
DRW
Note: View shown from the rear of
the vehicle to clearly identify the
jack point.
Note: Place the jack directly under
axle and inboard of the radius arm
so that the jack clears the radius
arm.
323
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• Front: F–450/F–550
• Rear: F-350 DRW
• Rear: F-450/F-550
13. Insert the jack handle into the
pump linkage.
14. Use an up-and-down motion
with the jack handle to raise the
wheel completely off the ground.
Hydraulic jacks are equipped
with a pressure release valve
that prevents lifting loads which
exceed the jack’s rated capacity.
324
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
15. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
16. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward on all front an inboard rear wheels. If replacing the
outboard wheel, the valve stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
17. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve
counterclockwise. Opening the release valve slowly will provide a more
controlled rate of descent.
The following steps apply to all vehicles:
18. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification.
8–lug nut torque sequence
325
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
10–lug nut torque sequence
19. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the flat/spare tire if the vehicle
is equipped with a spare tire carrier.
Note: Do not stow the Harley-Davidson flat tire and wheel using the
spare tire winch mechanism; store the flat in the bed of the truck.
20. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is
securely fastened so it does not rattle when driving.
21. Unblock the wheels.
The following step applies to F–250/F–350 Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) vehicles only:
22. When installing the wheel center
ornaments, ensure that the
ornament retention towers on the
back side of the ornament are
aligned with the studs/lug nuts. The
retention towers are designed to be
installed over the studs/nuts and
retain to the flange on the lug nut.
326
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
If the ornament retention towers are
aligned between the studs/lug nuts,
the ornament is improperly
installed. This improper installation
may appear and sound correct, but
will not keep the ornament on the
vehicle. Ornaments improperly
installed in this manner will fall off
or become loose with minimal force
or impact.
Installing dual rear wheel ornaments
1. Align the ornament with the lug
nuts.
• (1) is the clip and (2) is the
flange.
1
2
2. Hold the ornament so that all of
the retention clips are sitting on the
flange of the lug nuts.
3. Use your hand or rubber mallet to
tap the ornament in a star pattern.
There should be an even gap
between the ornament and the
wheel.
327
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
4. Be sure to install all the clips on the nuts over the flanges so that
there is an even gap all around and the retention clips are fully seated.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located in the glove box.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
328
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per scheduled maintenance information),
or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) after any wheel disturbance
(tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km), and again at 500 miles
(800 km) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (tire
rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
N•m
M14 x 1.5
165
224
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
It is important to follow the proper wheel mounting and lug nut torque
procedures.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,
apply one drop of motor oil between
the flat washer and the nut.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
329
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to
installation. If there is visible
corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lug nut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
330
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
331
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding
points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
332
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
333
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
334
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that the vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed using
flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. However, a wheel
lift may be used to lift the rear of the vehicle so long as, depending on
vehicle configurations, the following preparations are met:
• On Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) vehicles, the 4x4 control is
turned to the 2WD position prior to towing.
• On manual-shift transfer case vehicles, the front wheel hub locks are
in the FREE position prior to towing.
335
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Towing an ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the front wheels on the ground
without disengaging the front hubs may cause damage to the automatic
transmission.
Note: Towing a 4x2 or an ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground for more than 50 miles (80 km) and/or in excess of 35 mph
(56 km/h) may cause damage to the automatic transmission.
Note: On Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) vehicles, an outer rear wheel must be
removed prior to using a wheel lift wrecker.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
336
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling
your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you
return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
337
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Mailing address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
338
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
339
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your
claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case
in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the
BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as
well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually
decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
340
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
341
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
342
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
343
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
344
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft威
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft威 Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
345
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all
parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• 5.4L V8 gasoline engine
346
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• 6.8L V10 gasoline engine
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
347
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
(EXCEPT HARLEY-DAVIDSON)
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean and damp, white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry, white
cotton cloth.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
348
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE (HARLEY-DAVIDSON ONLY)
Your vehicle’s instrument panel and console are uniquely painted with both
high and low gloss paints that require special care. The high gloss area is
similar to that of the vehicle’s exterior; the low gloss area is designed to
help protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
High gloss paint area
In order to maintain the finish of the instrument panel and console, the
high gloss areas should be treated similar to the that of exterior paint or
glossy plastic surfaces. When cleaning the high gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflont (PTFE)-based products.
Dust the high gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft威 Dusting
Cloth (ZC-24 or ZC-25) or Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth Mitts (ZC-47).
For general cleaning, use mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then
dry with a clean, dry cloth; or Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
For removal of fine scuffs and scratches, use Scotch-Brite Microfiber Cloth
or cheese cloth along with Motorcraft威 Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A),
Motorcraft威 Paint Sealant (ZC-45), or Motorcraft威 Custom Clear Coat
Polish (ZC-8-A). Note: Removal of deep scuffs and scratches should be
performed by an authorized dealer or an experienced repair facility.
Low gloss paint area
The low gloss area of the instrument panel’s upper dash should be
cleaned with mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then dried with a
clean, dry cloth. When cleaning the low gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflont (PTFE)-based products.
• Do not use exterior paint waxes or sealants.
Dust the low gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft威 Dusting
Cloth (ZC-24 or ZC-25) or Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth Mitts (ZC-47).
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威 Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
349
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH
F–250 AND F–350 CREW CAB)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
For King Ranch F-250 and F-350 Crew Cab leather seats, refer to
separate section in this chapter.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating on the seat.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
350
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH F-250 AND F-350 CREW
CAB ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather. Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading
of the material.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft
brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap. If the leather
cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution, the
leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product
“Tanners Preserve Leather Cleaner” and a 3M “Type T” scrubbing pad.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather. For more specific cleaning
information, contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1–800–282–KING
(5464).
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
Scratches
Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
351
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch Saddle Shop. Visit the Web site at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
• Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking
delivery of your vehicle. Condition twice yearly in order to replenish
lost oils and revitalize the aroma, suppleness and resilience of the
leather.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth
• Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Note: Use care when using a power washer to clean the driveline,
especially the driveshaft and interfacing components. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid
specifications. For best results, use the following products or products of
equivalent quality:
Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威 Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威 Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
352
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Motorcraft威
Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S only) (ZC-20)
Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53–A)
Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
353
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and
services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威 parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal, place the
gearshift in 1 (First), and release the clutch pedal.
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal, place the
gearshift in N (Neutral), and release the clutch pedal.
354
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch located
below the passenger side of the
grille, next to the headlamp. Slide
the handle to release the auxiliary
latch.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
355
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Refer to the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component
locations.
5.4L V8 gasoline engines
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Battery
3. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Air filter assembly
10. Power distribution box
356
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
6.8L V10 gasoline engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Battery
3. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Air filter assembly
10. Power distribution box
357
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
358
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Press the lock
tab to release the blade and pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield to remove it from the
arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
359
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil dipstick.
• 5.4L/6.8L gasoline engines only;
for diesel engine information,
refer to the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the MIN
mark, add enough oil to raise the
level within the MIN-MAX range.
• Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
360
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft威 SAE
5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this chapter for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
361
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Ford production and Motorcraft威 replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft威 oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
WARNING: This vehicle
may be equipped with more
than one battery, removal of cable
from only one battery does not
disconnect the vehicle electrical
system. Be sure to disconnect
cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do
so may cause serious personal
injury or property damage.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft威 maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
362
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is also electronically controlled by a
computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed,
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
363
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
R
TU
LE
AD
RE
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
N
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of
coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Proper function of calibrated gauges.
364
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
365
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Do not mix coolants. Add the coolant type originally equipped
in your vehicle. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
366
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the
Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities section of your
6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s
Guide Supplement.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
367
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area.
368
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• The message center will indicate the engine is overheating.
• The
indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage; therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
369
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
FUEL FILTER
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
370
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
371
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel filler cap
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise until it clicks.
If the “Check Fuel Cap” indicator comes on and stays on after you start
the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the
engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
372
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The vehicle warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the
fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may
result in possible personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded
fuel or any other fuel. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and
could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
373
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as
(R+M)/2 METHOD
“Regular” with an octane rating
below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels
below 87 are not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
87
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. If the problems
persist, see your authorized dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
374
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the service engine soon
indicator, refer to
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
375
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
376
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
377
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed
(if equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA fuel economy estimates
If applicable, every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window
called the Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates.
Contact your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied
with your vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide
for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
378
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for
complete emission warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
engine soon
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
soon
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
379
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
If the service engine soon
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
indicator on can
continued driving with the service engine soon
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
indicator is on or not working
test if the service engine soon
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
indicator is on or the bulb does not
If the service engine soon
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
soon
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon
indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
380
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to scheduled maintenance
information. If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCON威 ATF.
• Gasoline engine shown; diesel
engine similar. Refer to
Identifying components in the
engine compartment in the 6.0
and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner Guide Supplement.
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20°F–80°F
(-7°C–25°C):
1. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low. Add fluid to bring fluid level up to be between
the MIN and MAX range.
3. Start the engine.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
5. Turn the engine off.
6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir. Do not add fluid if the level is
between the MIN and MAX range.
381
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it is between the MIN and MAX range. Refer to
Maintenance Products Specifications and Capacities in this chapter
for the proper fluid type. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir.
BRAKE FLUID
• Vacuum boost system
• Hydroboost system
The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the
brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add
fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range, the
performance of your brake system could be compromised; seek service
from your authorized dealer immediately.
382
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Check the fluid level. Refer to scheduled maintenance information for
the service interval schedules.
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should
remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step
in the reservoir.
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specifications. Refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product
label. For MEDICAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION contact a
physician or Poison Control Center immediately; on Ford-Motorcraft
products call: 1-800-959-3673 (FORD). Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt and water
from entering the reservoir.
2. Remove cap and rubber
diaphragm from reservoir.
3. Add fluid until the level reaches
the step in the reservoir.
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and
cap onto reservoir.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about
30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
383
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F
[66°C-77°C]).
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
384
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick handle and also in the
Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
technician.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
385
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Fluid level should be at the
bottom of the opening.
4. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid level
is at the bottom of the opening.
5. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Maintenance
Product Specifications and Capacities in this chapter.
386
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through
the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
387
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
AIR FILTER
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the 6.0 and 6.4
Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide
Supplement.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Loosen clamp and disconnect
sensor.
2. Release three retainer clamps.
3. Pull air filter cover toward passenger side of vehicle and up to release
the tabs. Lift air filter element up and out of housing.
The air filter box needs to be free of any debris before installing a new
air filter.
4. Install a new air filter element into the tray assembly.
388
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Return air filter cover to original
position making sure the four tabs
are engaged and secure the three
clamps. Tighten clamp on air tube
and reconnect sensor.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
5.4L V8/6.8L V10 engines
Air filter element
FA-1883
Fuel filter
FG-1083
Oil filter
FL-820-S
Battery (standard)
BXT-65-650
Battery (optional)
BXT-65-750
1
Spark plugs-platinum
Remote automatic transmission filter 2, 3
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威 or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
2
Also available with 6.4L diesel engine and TorqShift transmission. Part
number is FT-176.
3
Also available with 6.4L diesel engine and TorqShift transmission. Part
number is FT-175.
389
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
390
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine coolant
(5.4L V8 engine)2
Brake fluid (and clutch
fluid, if equipped)
Rear axle - F-450/550
(Dana S110/S130)
Rear axle - F-350
(DANA M80)
Rear axle - F-250/350
(10.50 inch axle)1
Spindle bearing
Front axle
Item
Ford part name
Ford part number /
Ford specification
5.8 pints (2.8L)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
XY-80W-90–QL /
Premium Rear Axle
WSP-M2C197–A
Lubricant
High Temperature 4X4
XG-11 /
—
Front Axle and Wheel
WSS-M1C267-A1
Bearing Grease
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
XY-75W140–QL /
6.9 pints (3.3L)
Synthetic Rear Axle
WSL-M2C192-A
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE 75W-90
XY-75W90–QLS /
8.5 pints (4.0L)
Synthetic Rear Axle
WSS–M2C918–A
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
XY-75W140–QL /
14.0 pints (6.6L)
Synthetic Rear Axle
WSL-M2C192-A
Lubricant
Motorcraft High
Fill to line or step
PM-1–C / WSS-M6C62-A
Performance DOT 3
(for clutch) on
Motor Vehicle Brake
or WSS-M6C65-A1
reservoir
Fluid
Motorcraft Premium
25.7 quarts
VC-7-B /
Gold Engine Coolant
(24.3L)
WSS-M97B51-A1
(yellow-colored)
Capacity
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Maintenance and Specifications
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine oil (includes
filter change) - diesel
engine
Fuel tank - Mid-ship
tank (optional on
Chassis Cab)
Engine oil (includes
filter change) - 5.4L V8
and 6.8L V10 gas
engines6
Engine and fuel coolant
- diesel engine
Engine coolant
(6.8L V10 engine)2
Item
Ford part name
Ford part number /
Ford specification
19.0 gallons
(71.9L)
—
—
Refer to the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement
26.7 quarts
(25.3L)
Motorcraft Premium
VC-7-B /
Gold Engine Coolant
WSS-M97B51-A1
(yellow-colored)
Refer to the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement
•Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 •XO-5W20-QFS (US)
Full Synthetic Motor Oil •CXO-5W20–LSP12
(US)
(Canada)
7.0 quarts (6.6L)
•Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 •CXO-5W-20-LFS12
Super Premium Motor
(Canada) /
Oil (Canada)
WSS-M2C930-A and API
•Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Certification Mark
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)
Capacity
Maintenance and Specifications
391
392
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
XL-12 / —
Motorcraft Transfer Case
Fluid
2.0 quarts (1.9L)
5.8 quarts (5.5L)4
Transfer case fluid
Manual transmission
fluid (S6-650) - gas
engine
Motorcraft
MERCON威 V ATF
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威 V
Motorcraft
MERCON威 V ATF
Keep fluid level
between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Power steering fluid
XT-5-QM/DM /
MERCON威 V
XG-1-C or XG-1-K /
WSD-M1C227-A
Motorcraft Premium
Long-Life Grease
—
XL-1 / None
Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
Transmission / parking
brake linkages and
pivots, brake and clutch
pedal shaft (if
equipped)
XG–4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93–B
—
—
—
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Multi-Purpose Grease
—
—
—
Ford part name
—
—
30.0 gallons
(113.4L)
38.0 gallons
(143.9L)
40.0 gallons
(151.4L)
Capacity
Lock cylinders
Fuel tank - Aft axle
(Chassis cab only)
Hinges, latches, striker
plates, fuel filler door
hinge and seat tracks
Fuel tank - Long box
Fuel tank - Short box
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
Ford part name
Ford part number /
Ford specification
17.5 quarts
(16.6L)5
Refer to the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement
Capacity
Motorcraft
XT-10–QLV /
MERCON威 LV ATF
MERCON威 LV
Motorcraft Premium
ZC-32–A /
Windshield washer fluid 3.5 quarts (3.3L)
Windshield Washer
WSB-M8B16–A2
Concentrate
1
Add 8 oz. (236 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification
EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of limited slip Ford axles. Ford design rear axles contain a
synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle has been submerged in water.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are
indicated on the dipstick blade or the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being
added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information to determine the
correct service interval.
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 LV should only use MERCON威 LV fluid.
Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
4
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with
the vehicle on a level surface. The 6-speed manual transmission is equipped with an in-tank cooler.
Verify the fluid level after operating vehicle to ensure correct fluid level.
5
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
6
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
Manual transmission
fluid (M6HDW) - diesel
engine
Automatic transmission
fluid (5R110)3
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
393
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Spark plug gap
Ignition system
Compression ratio
5.4L V8 engine
330
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
1.0–1.1mm
(0.039–0.043 inch)
Coil on plug
9.8:1
Drivebelt routing
5.4L V8/6.8L V10 engines
394
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6.8L V10 engine
415
87 octane
1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
1.0–1.1mm
(0.039–0.043 inch)
Coil on plug
9.2:1
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure by the
trailing edge of the driver’s door or
the edge of the driver’s door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
395
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Code
5
7
T
B
Description
Six-speed manual, Dana (ZF S6–650)
Six-speed manual, Dana (Z/F M6HD-W)
Five-speed automatic, TorqShift (gas engines)
Five-speed automatic, TorqShift (diesel engine)
396
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Chrome exhaust tips
Deflectors
Running boards
Splash guards
Step bars
Wheels
Interior style
Ambient lighting
Electrochromic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
397
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessories
Lifestyle
Ash cup / smoker’s package
Bedliners and bedmats
Cargo organization and management
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
Keyless entry keypad
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
Not all accessories are available for all models.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by your authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
398
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
More than 30 million Ford, Lincoln, and Mercury owners have discovered
the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask you dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford, Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in
the U.S. and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Genuine Ford and Motorcraft威 Parts.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
399
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades
• Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs (except
• Shock absorbers
California)
• Clutch disc
• Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealership today so they
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving
lifestyle and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
400
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
401
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Index
A
B
Accessory delay ........................126
Air cleaner filter ...............388–389
Air conditioning ........................102
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................................184
and child safety seats ............186
description ..............................184
disposal ....................................188
driver airbag ............................186
indicator light .........................188
operation .................................186
passenger airbag .....................186
passenger deactivation
switch ......................................189
Ambulance packages ....................7
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................364
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................268–269
Anti-theft system ..............159, 162
arming the system ..........160, 162
disarming a triggered
system .....................................162
triggering .................................162
Audio system
(see Radio) ......................43, 45, 52
Automatic transmission ............275
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................275
fluid, adding ............................383
fluid, checking ........................383
fluid, refill capacities ..............390
Auxiliary Input Jack ...................59
Auxiliary power point ...............124
Axle
refill capacities ........................390
402
Battery .......................................362
acid, treating emergencies .....362
jumping a disabled battery ....330
maintenance-free ....................362
replacement, specifications ...389
servicing ..................................362
Bed extender ............................145
Belt-Minder威 .............................180
Booster seats .............................211
Brakes ........................................268
anti-lock ...........................268–269
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................268
fluid, checking and adding ....382
fluid, refill capacities ..............390
parking ....................................269
shift interlock ..........................273
trailer .......................................255
Bulbs ..........................................113
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....390
Cassette tape player ...................43
Cell phone use ............................10
Child safety seats ......................198
attaching with tether straps ..206
in front seat ....................199, 202
in rear seat ..............199, 202, 206
LATCH .....................................206
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................211
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............346
instrument panel ............348–349
interior .....................................349
plastic parts ............................347
Index
safety belts ..............................349
washing ....................................344
waxing .....................................345
wheels ......................................345
wiper blades ............................347
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ....98, 102
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .............................54
AM/FM/CD .................................47
Clutch
fluid ..........................................383
operation while driving ..........278
recommended shift speeds ....278
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment .................37
Console ..............................122–123
overhead ..........................121–122
Controls
power seat ...............................166
steering column ......................134
Coolant
checking and adding ..............364
refill capacities ................367, 390
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ..................131
Customer Assistance ................302
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .....................................352
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................399
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............341
Getting roadside assistance ...302
Getting the service you
need .........................................337
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................342
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................341
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ..............................108
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................383
engine oil .................................359
Driving under special
conditions ..................277, 292, 296
sand .........................................294
snow and ice ...........................296
through water .................295, 298
DVD system .................................68
E
Electronic message center ...25, 33
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................330
Emergency Flashers .................303
Emission control system ..........378
Engine ........................................394
cleaning ...................................346
coolant .....................................364
diesel ...........................................6
fail-safe cooling .......................368
idle speed control ...................362
refill capacities ........................390
service points ..................356–357
starting after a collision .........304
Engine oil ..................................359
checking and adding ..............359
dipstick ....................................359
filter, specifications ........361, 389
recommendations ...................361
403
Index
refill capacities ........................390
Event data recording ....................8
Exhaust fumes ..........................266
F
Fail safe cooling ........................368
Family entertainment system ....68
Fluid capacities .........................390
Fog lamps ..................................107
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......284
description ..............................289
driving off road .......................291
electronic shift ................285, 289
indicator light .........................286
lever operated shift ................286
manual locking hubs ..............284
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................273
Fuel ............................................370
calculating fuel
economy ......................26, 35, 375
cap ...........................................372
capacity ...................................390
choosing the right fuel ...........373
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................378
detergent in fuel .....................374
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................370, 372, 375
filter, specifications ........370, 389
fuel pump shut-off switch .....304
improving fuel economy ........375
octane rating ...................374, 394
quality ......................................374
running out of fuel .................375
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................370
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......304
Fuses ..................................305–306
404
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............372
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................375
Gauges .........................................21
transmission fluid
temperature gauge ...................25
H
Hazard flashers .........................303
Head restraints .................163, 169
Headlamps .................................107
aiming ..............................109, 111
autolamp system .....................107
daytime running lights ...........108
flash to pass ............................108
high beam ...............................108
replacing bulbs ...............115–117
turning on and off ..................107
Heating
heater only system ...................98
heating and air conditioning
system ...............................99, 102
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................139
Hood ..........................................355
I
Ignition ...............................263, 394
Illuminated visor mirror ...........121
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................198
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................380
Index
Instrument panel
cleaning ...........................348–349
cluster ........................................14
lighting up panel and
interior .....................................109
doors ........................................148
Lug nuts ....................................329
Lumbar support, seats .....167–168
M
J
Jump-starting your vehicle ......330
K
Keyless entry system
autolock ...................................149
keypad .....................................157
locking and unlocking doors ..159
programming entry code .......157
Keys ...................................160–161
positions of the ignition .........263
L
Lamps
autolamp system .....................107
daytime running light .............108
fog lamps .................................107
headlamps ...............................107
headlamps, flash to pass ........108
instrument panel, dimming ...109
interior lamps .........................113
replacing bulbs ...............115–119
LATCH anchors .........................206
Lights, warning and indicator ....14
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........268
Limited-slip axle .......................272
Load limits .................................243
Loading instructions .................250
Locks
autolock ...................................149
childproof ................................152
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Manual transmission .................278
fluid capacities ........................390
reverse .....................................279
Message center .....................25, 33
english/metric button .........28, 37
system check button ................37
warning messages ...............28, 38
Mirrors ...............................126–127
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ......................................126
fold away .........................128–130
side view mirrors (power) .....127
signal .......................................130
Moon roof ..................................138
Motorcraft威 parts ..............370, 389
N
Navigation system .......................97
O
Octane rating ............................374
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................359
P
Parking brake ............................269
Parts
(see Motorcraft威 parts) ...........389
Pedals (see Power adjustable
foot pedals) ...............................131
Power adjustable foot pedals ...131
405
Index
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................310
Power door locks ......................148
Power mirrors ...........................127
Power point ...............................124
Power steering ..........................271
fluid, checking and adding ....381
fluid, refill capacity ................390
Power Windows .........................124
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................273
R
Radio ................................43, 45, 52
Rear seat entertainment
system ..........................................68
Rear-view camera system .........282
Relays ........................................305
Remote entry system ...............152
illuminated entry ....................157
locking/unlocking
doors ................................148, 153
replacing the batteries ...........155
Reverse sensing system ...........280
Roadside assistance ..................302
S
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) .....172–177
Safety defects, reporting ..........343
Safety restraints ................172–177
Belt-Minder威 ...........................180
extension assembly ................183
for adults .........................173–177
for children .............................194
406
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
lap belt ....................................179
warning light and
chime ...............................179–180
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ......................................206
Safety seats for children ..........198
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................395
Satellite Radio Information ........65
Seats ..........................................163
child safety seats ....................198
cleaning ...................................351
heated ......................................102
memory seat ...................154, 168
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ........................................157
SecuriLock passive
anti-theft system ...............159, 161
Servicing your vehicle ..............354
Setting the clock
AM/FM/CD .................................47
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ................54
Snowplowing .................7, 299–300
SOS Post Crash Alert ...............188
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................389, 394
Special notice ................................7
ambulance conversions ..............7
diesel-powered vehicles .............6
four-wheel drive vehicles .......301
utility-type vehicles ....................6
Speed control ............................131
Starting your vehicle ........263–265
jump starting ..........................330
Steering wheel
controls ....................................134
tilting .......................................121
Index
SYNC威 ..........................................97
T
Tailgate ......................................143
Temperature control
(see Climate control) .................98
Tilt steering wheel ....................121
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....236
Tires ...................................218–219
alignment ................................228
care ..........................................224
changing ..........................317, 319
checking the pressure ............223
inflating ...................................220
label .........................................235
replacing ..................................226
rotating ....................................228
safety practices .......................227
sidewall information ...............230
snow tires and chains ............242
spare tire .................................315
terminology .............................219
tire grades ...............................219
treadwear ........................218, 225
Towing .......................................251
recreational towing .................262
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............255
trailer towing ..........................251
wrecker ....................................335
Traction control ........................270
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................255
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................387
Transmission
automatic operation ...............275
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....273
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................383
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................386
fluid, refill capacities ..............390
manual operation ....................278
Turn signal ................................112
U
Upfitter controls .......................137
USB port ......................................61
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................395
Vehicle loading ..........................243
Ventilating your vehicle ...........266
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......14
Washer fluid ..............................358
Water, Driving through .............298
Windows
power .......................................124
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ........................................120
checking and adding fluid .....358
replacing wiper blades ...........359
Wrecker towing .........................335
407
2010 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download PDF

advertising